IThe soul, wrapped in the Astral Body, abandons the physical body
What leaves the body in sleep and what stays in the bed: the astral body, the ethereal double, the Ego that most people travel in, and the silver cord that brings the soul back.
Disciple: Venerable Master, you just said that not everyone has an astral body. My question is why the person who dreams –and I believe everyone dreams– is in his bed, asleep and, nevertheless, he dreams that he is somewhere else. What happened there: a projection of the astral body, a projection of the Consciousness or a projection of the thought? Master: With the greatest pleasure we will give an answer to our brother R. Certainly, the astral body or the “Kesdjan body” is a luxury that not all human beings can afford. No one is born with an astral body, except those who created it in previous lives.
The Fifth Gospel Pedagogy of Knowing How to Live Third Chamber Mexico City – 1974
It means that the Essence, the animic material, the directing factor of all the psychological processes that we carry inside us, is bottled up within the Ego, within the “I”, the Myself, the Oneself, and when the time for normal, ordinary sleep comes, the Ego, the psychological “I” –within which the Essence is bottled up–, abandons the physical body so that the vital vehicle can repair the dense body; because if the vital vehicle does not repair the dense body, the dense body dies.
The Fifth Gospel Pedagogy of Knowing How to Live Third Chamber Mexico City – 1974
And for the vital vehicle to be able to repair the physical body, it is necessary for the Ego –in which the Essence is bottled up– to abandon the physical body. Then the Ego travels to different places of the world, and of course, as it carries the asleep Consciousness, it dreams, and the dreams are transmitted through the silver cord and so they reach the physical brain. But it is the Ego that comes out of the dense form; that is all. Is there any other question, brothers? You can ask your question.
The Fifth Gospel Pedagogy of Knowing How to Live Third Chamber Mexico City – 1974
If this is done in a conventional way, we say “so-and-so went out in the astral body”. We already know that so-and-so does not yet have the astral body. So, the Ego –within which is the Essence, the Consciousness– went out; he was “awake” for a while and could live outside the physical body, move, travel to different places. What happens is that the Ego serves as the astral body. But it is very far from having the perfection of the astral body. The Ego is the Ego and that is all.
The Fifth Gospel Pedagogy of Knowing How to Live Third Chamber Mexico City – 1974
The spleen is a very important organ in the human organism. When the hour of sleep arrives, the soul, wrapped in the Astral Body, abandons the physical body and travels about the world of the fifth dimension. Meanwhile, something remains inside the physical body. This something is the Ethereal Double. The double is the Lingam Sarira of the sages of Hindustan. Dr. Paracelsus named that ethereal double the Mumia.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957
When the soul, wrapped in its Astral Body, reenters the physical body, the body is already repaired. If the conscious being were not to leave the physical body, then his emotions and thoughts would interfere with the reconstruction of his human organism.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957
So, the astral body is material, and it is a dense organism such as the physical body. The fact that matter in its last synthesis is reduced to energy does not deny its existence once in that state. If we cannot see it with our sense of sight it is because it belongs to the fourth dimension. Our physical eyes will not serve for seeing the astral plane until we make them suitable for this purpose, or until we place ourselves into the astral plane with our physical body. Thus, the astral organism is as dense as the physical organism, yet, it belongs to another department of the kingdom.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
The Theurgist must be skillful in the Astral World. The Theurgist has to leave consciously in the ASTRAL BODY. Therefore, before entering the field of theurgic invocations, we should first of all learn to “enter” and “leave” the physical body, at will. In reality, the Astral Body is the suit of the Soul. Within the Astral Body, we have the mind, the will, the conscience and the spirit.
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959
Modern metaphysical literature speaks a lot about projections of the Astral Body; we must however, have the valour to recognise that the enthusiasts of occultism usually project within the ego in order to travel in the sub-lunar regions of nature through time and space.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
With the Solar Astral we are able to move through the Milky Way to the central Sun, Sirius. It is forbidden to us to go beyond the Milky Way because in the other galaxies different types of Cosmic Laws exist which are unknown to the inhabitants of this galaxy. On Sirius there is a great Temple where the great Masters of this galaxy receive an Initiation. The disciples of the God Sirius are Gnostic Rosicrucia ns. The true Rose Cross is in the Superior Worlds. These disciples utilise the Holy Grail upon their capuches. They also celebrate the Drama of Christ because this is a Cosmic Drama.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
Every organ is known clearly by its functions, and one knows that one has an astral body when one is able to travel with it (see Chapter 6 of this same treatise).
The Three Mountains, 1972
In state number 5, a Blue Phantom appears on the left side of the hypnotized patient. Likewise, in state number 6, on the patient’s left side another Phantom appears but Red. Then, upon reaching state number 7, both Phantoms unite and become one and copenetrate into irregular white-violet bands when reaching state number 8. In state number 9, the Astral Double, thus integrated, starts to enhance a relative liberty of movements, although without severing the Silver Cord which connects to the Physical Body, since the rupture of such a cord would signify’ death.
The Solar Bodies, 1968
Such a cord is the thread of life, the septuple Antakarana of the Hindustani. It is something magnetic and subtle, that has the power of extending or prolonging itself until the Infinite.
Runic Magic, 1969
The silver cord has the power of infinitely elongating itself this is how the souls can freely travel throughout the starry space. So, I trave led a lot and arrived at the Temple. Filled with ecstasy, I advanced through the mysterious path which conduces the Initia tes until the doors of this very saintly place. I was then unexpectedly attacked by a great beast, by a Mitraic bull, which was dreadful in a great manner.
Runic Magic, 1969
The end of the Magnetic Thread is joined to such atom... Any creature can leave the body during normal sleep to travel many times to remote distances; The Thread of Life extends as far as the Infinite and always allows us to return to the physical body...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
Many inhabitants of the infernal worlds dwell in the region of fire, but others live in the aerial regions, and finally they inhabit the aquatic regions and the mineral zones. It is obvious that the inhabitants of the terrestrial interior are quite related with sulfur, since this is an integral part of volcanoes; however, it is evident that only those who dwell in the fire could be associated with sulfur in this manner. Therefore, distinguished gentleman, honorable public, esteemed ladies and gentlemen, I want you to comprehend the inferno or “infernus” in a crudely natural form, without artifices of any type. Question: Could you tell me Master, why is it that since the region of the lower abdomen is the one of the infernal worlds, it is located in the region of the silver cord? Does this mean that said cord is constantly communicating with our infernal worlds? Answer: Honorable sir, I want to respond with perfect clarity. Much has been said about the silver cord; it is indubitable that every soul is connected to the physical body through this magnetic thread. We have been told that a branch of this cord or thread of life is found related to the heart and another related to the brain.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
Diverse authors emphasize the idea that seven of these branches derived from the silver cord are found connected with seven specific centers of the human organism.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
In any case, this thread of life, this cord which you talk to us about, the very basis of your question, is in no way connected to the seven chakras of the lower abdomen. It is interesting to know that during the hours of sleep, the essence, the soul escapes the physical body to travel to distinct places of the earth or of the cosmos; then the magnetic thread of our existence is loosened, it stretches infinitely, attracting us afterwards to the physical body so as to awaken in bed.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
When that which is called death occurs, then, the ego abandons the physical body. The ego or soul is united to the physical body through the silver cord. This cord of astral matter is the one which maintains the soul united to the physical body. Yet, when such a cord is cut, then, the soul no longer can enter into the physical body. Commonly, that cord is cut three days after death has occurred.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The silver cord is united to the left ventricle of the heart. When we travel in astral body, the soul can return into the physical body thanks to such a cord. However, when death occurs, the soul no longer can return into her physical body, because the cord is already cut.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
In the fine arts building in Mexico, F.D., we find an Aztec sculpture of the Bat God. We are going to talk about it even if the tenebrous ones slander us and classify us as black magicians. This sculpture is a precious Aztec symbol of one of the principal hierarchs of death. The Angels of Death work under the influence of Saturn and disembody the souls according to the Law of Karma. Their symbols are the bat, the owl and the scythe. They take the soul out of the body and cut the silver cord that unites the soul to the body. During sleep, souls can travel anywhere and return to the body thanks to the silver cord. When the Angels of Death are working, they adopt a skeletal appearance; after their work, they assume a beautiful appearance; they are really Angels.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
IIDuring the hours of sleep every human being functions in the Astral body
His teaching that everyone leaves the body in sleep, most people with their consciousness asleep, and that dreams are astral experiences to be read as symbols.
During the hours of sleep, the soul comes out of the body and visits all those places that are familiar to it.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
When the flesh and bone body is asleep, the soul leaves the flesh and bone body and wanders everywhere. The soul voyages in its astral body.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
When King Nebuchadnezzar lay sleeping in his bed, he thought about what he would be in the future; then he fell asleep. The King's soul then left the flesh-andbone body, traveled on the astral plane, and saw a statue whose head was of gold; its breast and arms were of silver; its legs were of iron and its feet were partly iron and partly baked clay.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
112. In moments of dozing, the Soul comes out of the physical body and travels throughout the suprasensible worlds.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
During sleep, every human being wanders in the internal worlds with consciousness asleep. The soul enveloped in its astral body abandons the physical body during sleep. This is how the Etheric Body can repair the dense body.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The Intellectual Animal divides his painful and miserable life between run-of-the-mill sleep and the improperly called Vigil state, which unfortunately is another form of sleep. While the physical body sleeps in bed, the Ego, enveloped in its Lunar Bodies, goes around with the consciousness asleep like a somnambulist moving freely in the molecular region.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening, Identification
The first state of Consciousness is the normal, ordinary sleep. The pluralized “I” (enveloped by its Lunar Protoplasmic Bodies) abandons the Physical Body and ambulates within the Molecular World.
The Solar Bodies, 1968
In this concrete case it was that which one calls an unfoldment, your soul was absent from the physical body. It is clear that during normal, common and ordinary sleep, all souls leave the body and move about, going to different places later returning to the physical body at the precise moment of awakening. The vigil state comes precisely when the soul enters once again into the body of flesh and bone.
Beyond Death
Do you really not know what unfoldment is? I understand very well, miss, that your question is sincere. Unfoldment is extremely plain and simple, it is a natural phenomenon like eating, drinking, etc., etc., etc. It is clear that when the physical body is sleeping, the soul departs from it and travels everywhere. The soul, upon returning, upon placing itself once again within its body, often remembers the places where it was, the people with whom it spoke, etc., and this is what you denominate dreams. This is really unfoldment.
Beyond Death
By all means sleep is necessary in order to be able to unfold oneself, even if it’s done at will.
Beyond Death
Many times before falling asleep, at the precise instant of transition between vigil and sleep, we feel within our own mind different voices that talk to each other. Those are the different “I’s” that must in such moments break all connection with the different centers of our organic machine, so as to then submerge themselves in the molecular world within the Fifth Dimension.
Treatise of Revolutionary Psychology, 1975
It is necessary to know that when people fall asleep, they come out of their physical bodies, but they carry along their dreams, they live in the internal worlds dreaming and when they return to the physical body, they continue with their dreams, they continue dreaming.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
While outside of the body merchants buy and sell in their shops, without realizing that they are outside of the body.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
During the hours of sleep we see the souls of dressmakers, mechanics, shopkeepers, peddlers, etc., dedicated to the same work and daily occupations. Those souls function asleep, convinced and certain that they are in their bodies of flesh and bone. When someone tells them that they are outside of the body, they do not believe it and they mock the person who tells them.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Awakening
If those souls were to realize that they are outside of the body, then they would be able to transport themselves to any corner of the world in a few moments. Thus, the wife who suffers fro the absent man whom she loves; the fiancée who is suffering for her husband to be; they can visit him without being seen. The mother whose son is absent, she can visit her child and acquaint herself with his life. The important thing is to know the key, the secret, in order to realize that one is outside of the body.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
Therefore, it is indispensable for the dreamer to awake, it is urgent to awaken the consciousness. All the human beings travel in astral body during the hours of sleep, but they disgracefully live in the astral plane with the consciousness asleep. They are sleeping wanderers.
The Aquarian Message, 1960 also in Awakening
When the dreamer awakes from his dreams, then he elevates himself into inspirational knowledge. The Masters of the White Lodge do not dream. They live at every hour with their consciousness awakened and in the state of vigil even when their physical bodies are sleeping within their beds.
The Aquarian Message, 1960 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
As you go home now, as your bodies fall asleep in your respective beds, obviously, you will go out of the body, and upon getting out of the body, clearly you will come to join each other again the way you are gathered here tonight, in the physical. This is how you will meet there, in the astral, for the same purpose: for the study of the awakening, and it is clear that you will receive the help of the Masters of the Occult Fraternity. Thus, you are fostering extraordinary associations for the Superior Worlds.
The Fifth Gospel Psychic Associations that Lead to Awakening Third Chamber – Mexico City – 1975
12. During the hours of sleep every human being functions in the Astral body. Dreams are the Astral experiences. 13. On awakening, we should force ourselves to remember all our Astral experiences. 14. During sleep every person is outside his physical body.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
30. The disciple will notice that his dreams become clearer day by day. He will then comprehend that when his physical body sleeps, the internal man travels, acts, and works within the supra-sensible worlds.
Igneous Rose, 1954
31. The disciple will now understand that the so-called dreams are living experiences in the internal worlds.
Igneous Rose, 1954
40. There are no false dreams. Every dream is a living experience in the internal worlds. 41. Even the so-called nightmares are real experiences, because the monsters of nightmares truly exist in the submerged worlds.
Igneous Rose, 1954
42. Indigestion can put certain chakras of the lower abdomen into activity. We then penetrate into the human being’s own atomic infernos where, truly, the most monstrous beings of the universe live. This is what is called nightmares.
Igneous Rose, 1954
43. The images of the supra-sensible worlds are totally symbolic. There is a need to learn how to interpret them, basing ourselves in the law of philosophical analogies, in the law of analogies of the opposites, in the law of correspondences, and the law of numerology. 44. Even the most apparently absurd dreams enclose the greatest revelation, if they are wisely interpreted.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
And so dreams are astral experiences. Our disciples must call them astral experiences and not dreams. Our disciples must say last night I was at such and such a place; last night I was in astral body at such and such a place; I had an experience with so-and-so in such-and-such a temple, etc.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
An account
Daniel's soul then left his body, and saw in Astral King Nebuchadnezzar's famous statue. The next day Daniel went before the King and prophesied the dream of the statue for him, and gave him his statement, that is the interpretation. The King was astounded, and honors were heaped upon Daniel.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
In astral body we masters subject disciples to many tests. In an astral plane and in astral bodies our disciples receive their initiations in the temples of the astral plane. The astral plane is known in the Bible by the name of "Mount." On the Mount, Jesus transfigured himself before his disciples. The Mount is Astral. During sleep our disciples are on the Mount. It is in the interest of our disciples to study the Book of Daniel in the Bible. All of Daniel's visions were on the Mount, on the astral plane, and not on the physical plane.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
Disciple: Master, is every dream an unfolding, an astral projection, or is it on some occasions a mental projection? Master: Well, during the hours of sleep, the Ego cannot be within the body, because if the Ego remained within the physical body during the hours of sleep, then the vital body –or Linga Sharira– could not repair the physical body. Normally, the Linga Sharira, the vital body, repairs the body itself during the hours when the Ego is absent. In those hours, the thyroid gland secretes many biological iodines that disinfect the organism. The solar plexus also works intensively and the hepatic plexus –wonderfully– captures, in such instants of sleep, the solar energy and then distributes it through all the channels of the great sympathetic nervous system, and the repair of the physical body is done. That is, when the Ego returns to the body again, this body is already completely repaired and ready for new activities of the day. Therefore, what is lived in dreams happens outside the physical body.
The Fifth Gospel The Intimate Need to Not Project Excursion – Alameda Park, Mexico City
The dreams that the Ego has outside the physical body, in the internal worlds, in the supra-sensitive regions of Nature and the cosmos, are simply projections of the mind, because, after all, the Ego is the mind. It takes everything and projects its dreams, it lives in dreams. However, there are things that are not dreams. You may perceive, for example, revelations of the great Masters or receive some special enlightenment, but only on rare occasions. Normally, people live in a world of dreams, projecting their dreams and dreaming, unfortunately.
The Fifth Gospel The Intimate Need to Not Project Excursion – Alameda Park, Mexico City also in Awakening
The Sephira Hod of the Hebraic Kabbalah receives a force of a Mercurial type within the radiant manifestations of the astral plane. This force within the astral body is absolutely Mercurial. This is why the messages that descend from the world of the Pure Spirit become symbolic in the astral plane. These symbols are interpreted based on the Law of Philosophical Analogies, Analogies of the Contraries and in the Law of Correspondences and Numerology. Study the book of Daniel and the biblical passages of the Patriarch Joseph, son of Jacob, so that you can learn how to interpret your own astral experiences. The Astral Plane is really the Plane of Practical Magic. In the oriental valleys of the South American Country of Colombia, the natives know how to enter into the Astral Plane at will. They mix the ashes of a tree called Guarumo with very well grounded leaves of coca. Afterwards, they ritualistically chew such a vegetal mixture while being in a squatting position (this is the Peruvian Huacas’ position).
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
Very ancient Scriptures of Tibetan Tantrism speak about a universal secret Order from the Astral world, which can initiate any aspirant during the normal, common and current dream state, while out of the physical body.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Go to sleep with your head towards the north. Relax your body, invoke Tahuil and call upon the Adepts of the Order of the Epoptae with the following prayer: “OM, I call, I invoke the Master Tahuil and the Adepts of the Order of the Epoptae, so that they can take me out from my physical body and awake me in the Astral world.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
IThere is a transitional state between vigil and sleep
The moment between waking and sleep, when the keys are used: watching your own sleep, quieting the mind, getting up from the bed as a real act, and joining imagination with will.
A practiceNight 5
Astral travels and the Kabbalah are an integral whole. There is a transitional state between vigil and sleep. Every human being involuntarily comes out of the body in that instant. By paying attention, we can voluntarily and consciously come out in that instant of transition that exists between vigil and sleep. The important thing is to watch sleep. Then we can get up from the bed and come out of our house, heading towards the Gnostic Church. Our Lord the Christ officiates in the Gnostic Church. All that disciples have to do is to watch their sleep and get up from the bed during those instants of dozing. The explanation that we give should be translated into facts. Those who have read a great deal erroneously suppose that the matter is mental, they think that they should mentally get up. We repeat that this should be translated into deeds. We must rise as naturally as we do in the mornings.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
21. The yogi who wants to project himself in his Astral body must take advantage of that transition state that exists between vigil and sleep. 22. The Yogi shall get up out of his bed in the very instant of falling asleep and go out of his bedroom towards the palace of the Lords of Karma to arrange his negotiations. He can go to any Temple of Mysteries.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
19. Billions of black magicians exist in the Astral and Mental planes; they disguise themselves as saints or Masters of the White Lodge to mislead the disciples or to dictate false oracles to them.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
23.This former procedure must be executed with actions; it is not a mere mental exercise. 24.The Yogi must get up from his bed in the instants of getting slumber, just as a somnambulist will do it. 25. Triumph is attained with patience and perseverance.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
Those submerge within Eternity. They attract and repel according to the laws of universal magnetization. If you want to check it, it is easy: learn how to leave the physical body at will.
The Fifth Gospel The Reality and Fantasy of our Psychology Public Lecture – 1976
I have already explained to you that within every person there are many persons, that is, there are many “I’s”. Because one thing is “I envy”, and another, “I do not envy”; one thing is “I love”, and another is “I do not love”; one thing is “I hate”, and another thing is “I do not hate”. All those “I’s” do not go to the grave. There are also some “good I’s” that do not go to the grave. Conclusion: what continues beyond the grave is a bunch of “I’s”.
The Fifth Gospel The Reality and Fantasy of our Psychology Public Lecture – 1976
A practiceNight 5
We have methods to investigate that which is called the “beyond”. One of those methods is called “astral projection”. It is easy to project oneself at will: one just has to lie down with the head toward the North; become the spy of one’s own dream; relax the physical body, and when one is already in that state of transition that exists between wakefulness and sleep, then, identify with the spiritual, feel oneself as a spirit, and feel oneself as a soul. And gently, in such a state of drowsiness, get up from the bed. What I have said, “get up”, must be translated into action. It is not a matter of thinking of getting up; translate it into action: get up! And if you do get up and then tum around to look at your bed, you will see that your physical body has fallen asleep in it. This is something similar to what the owner of a car would do, who after reaching his destination, steps out of his car and looks at it from the outside.
The Fifth Gospel The Reality and Fantasy of our Psychology Public Lecture – 1976
A practice
124. The clue to come out in the Astral Body is the following: 125. The disciple should lull himself to sleep in his bed.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
A practiceNight 6
126. When the disciple finds himself in that state of transition, which exists between vigil and sleep, he should rise from his bed exactly the way a somnambulist does.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 6
127. Before leaving the room, the disciple will jump with the intention of floating in the atmosphere.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 6
128. If the disciple does not float, he gets into bed again and repeats the experiment. 129. However, if upon jumping, the disciple floats in the air, then tie should leave the room and fly towards the GNOSTIC CHURCH. 130. This is not a mental exercise.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
131. What we are saying here should be translated into facts.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
A practice
132. During instants of falling asleep, the disciple will rise from his bed the way the somnambulists do.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
When the student already finds himself in that state of drowsiness or somnolence that precedes sleep, he should get out of bed and leave the room. How? In what manner? Almost all students suppose that it is an exercise of magnetism or auto-suggestion, etc., but they are lamentably mistaken because here we are not dealing with auto suggestion or hypnotisms. Simply get out of bed for Nature will do the rest. She will know how to separate the astral body from the physical body. The disciple merely needs to stand up and leave his room for Nature will do the rest.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
Already out of his room, the student will take a little hop with the intention of floating in space and if he floats, he will then be able to transport himself to the Gnostic Church in a few seconds. But if he does not float, the disciple should once again get into bed and repeat the experiment. Some succeed immediately, others take months and even years to learn. But the “tenacious” succeeds in the end.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
2nd In an almost imperceptible manner, a keynote always resounds within the brain of every living being. That keynote is that of the ray to which each person belongs and seems to come from the cells of the cerebellum. Some hear the sound of small flutes of the Egyptian ray; others will hear the “gong” of the Oriental ray, others the roaring of the sea, of the lunar ray, etc. If the disciple silences all his thoughts in the calm of the night, he will hear his keynote; then he can cause that note to vibrate loudly, with will and when the note is already so loud that it invades and semi-paralyzes the entire physical body, the disciple should get out of bed and betake himself to the Gnostic Church for the Masters of the White Brotherhood will receive him there with incomparable happiness.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practiceNight 7
That which you always do in an involuntary, unconscious way, learn to do it in a voluntary and conscious way. You have always unfolded; in the moments of becoming drowsy all souls leave the body, in an unfortunately unconscious way. Do the same, but in a voluntary and conscious way. I repeat: when you feel yourself in this state of lassitude characteristic of sleep, when you begin to be drowsy, imagine yourself to be like a subtle, vaporous ghost; think that you are going to depart from your body; comprehend that you are not the body; understand that you are a soul; feel yourself being a soul and get up from your bed gently, delicately, as souls get up. Translate what I am telling you into concrete facts. It is not a question of thinking, but of doing. Upon getting up, next give a little jump within your own bedroom with the firm intention of floating in space; thus, it is clear that if you float it is because you are now outside of the physical body. Then you can leave your bedroom and float in space. You can go away to Paris, to London or to the place where you wish. But if you do not float, it is because you have gotten up from your bed with the physical body, so get back into your bed once again and repeat the experiment.
Beyond Death also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
I want you to understand me. It is clear that if you float in the surrounding environment, it is because you are outside of the physical body; in this concrete case, you should comprehend that your body has remained situated within the bed and that you are outside of the body and far from the bed.
Beyond Death
A practice
6. When one feels oneself floating, should one think to travel to a determined place? I want you to comprehend that it is not a question of thinking, but rather of doing, which is different. For example, I am seeing you seated in that chair, but if you think you are going to get up from that chair and go to the street and you do not act, it is clear that you will remain seated there in the chair. Action is what is needed. Have you understood me?
Beyond Death
A practice
The key to traveling in the astral body is very simple: the disciple should lie in his bed and try to go to sleep calmly. Then the disciple should get up from his bed while he is slumbering, and leave his room. If the disciple jumps slightly intending to stay afloat in the air, he will see with astonishment that he is delightfully floating in the air and that he can travel by astral body to any place on Earth. The disciple can go by astral body to the palace of the Lords of Karma. In this temple he can settle his affairs with the Lords of Karma. When we say affairs, we refer to our outstanding debts to cosmic justice. The Lords of the Law also grant credit, but all credit must be paid back by doing good works for the benefit of humanity. We must learn to go out in the astral body to settle our affairs personally with the Lords of Karma. When a man learns to manage his accounts, he can guide his life better.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
When it is said that Christ, Peter, John, and James climbed the mountain to pray, and that Christ was transfigured in their presence, we have to understand that their bodies of flesh and bone slept while their souls were praying outside of the body, on the mount.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
Every human being can visit the mount at will. The important thing is to comprehend that we are souls who have bodies, and that we are able to enter and leave the body at will. Every Christian can learn how to come out of the body at will. The key is the following: The person will lie down on his bed, become sleepy, and when he finds that he is already asleep he will gently get up from his bed, being careful not to wake himself up from his dream.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
A practice
Then he will leave his bedroom, and will take a little jump with the intention of floating, and thus flying, any one of us can go to wherever our hearts carries us. A mother could visit her distant child, see him, and talk to him. A husband could visit his wife who is far away, see her, and she in turn could do the same. This is not a mental exercise; we are not dealing with something mental here. When we say that the Christian ought to gently get out of bed, he must do it; it is to be understood in this way. However, take care of the sleep that you have attained, because the power to enter the mount is in this sleep. The important thing is to abandon laziness, and get up from your bed at the moment of falling asleep.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Laziness
On the mount, all souls can converse with the Virgin of Carmel, and with the beloved Son born from her womb.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
A practice
Without any anxiety I proposed to keep watch, to spy on my own sleep... I wanted to use that state of transition that exists between alertness and lethargy, for my astral exit... When the process of dreaming began, when characteristic dream images started to arise, delicately, feeling like a spirit, I made an effort to eliminate laziness and then rose from the bed... I left my bedroom as if I was a phantom, walking delicately, next leaving the house... Through the streets of the city floated delightfully, filled with an exquisite spiritual voluptuousness.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Laziness
An account
I wanted to make an astral exploration of such a depth as well and for this reason I acceded to his plea....
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
A practice
And so it happened one exquisite night with a full moon, I slept very peacefully in the dorsal position (on my back) and with my body well relaxed....
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
It was not difficult to get my bearing; soon I was in the place of events , in the actual terrain...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Before that black, terrible hole which was now more than seventy metres deep, an old dwarf, a pygmy, a respectably white bearded gnome innocently contemplated me.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Elemental Magic
An account
Floating through the atmosphere I smoothly descended along to the watery bottom of the illfated pit of greed...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Greed
An account
With my astral feet touching the slime of the humid, shady earth, I made one more pleasant effort and penetrated beneath the very floor of the well...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
We have given many clues in order to consciously travel with the astral body, so, thousands of students have learned to travel in their astral body. However, we have seen in practice that those people who cannot quiet the mind, not even for an instant, who are accustomed to hopping from school to school, from lodge to lodge, always inquiring, always preoccupied, are not able to consciously astral travel.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practiceNight 8
Therefore, the clue in order to consciously travel in the astral body is to empty the mind. Practice While lying down with his body, the student will beg his internal God to take him out of his physical body. After this imploration the student must empty his mind, because for this practice it is useless to think. So, by comprehending the uselessness of thinking, the student will absolutely clear his mind and not think. Thus, by comprehending the uselessness of thinking, the mind will remain quiet and in silence for this practice. Before anything else, comprehend that in order to consciously travel in the astral body, the process of thinking is an obstacle. When we comprehend the uselessness of thinking during this practice, which will take us to inspirational knowledge, then the mind will naturally remain quiet and in silence. There is the need to distinguish between a mind which is quiet and a mind which has to be forced to be quiet. There is the need to distinguish between a mind which is in silence and a mind which is silenced by force. When the mind is quiet and silenced with violence, a secret struggle exists, and this mind is therefore not quiet, neither is it in silence. Only when we have comprehended the uselessness of thinking during these practices. will the mind remain quiet and in silence by itself.
The Aquarian Message, 1960 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practiceNight 8
Afterwards, the student must tranquilly fall asleep. If the student achieves falling asleep without thinking, that is to say with his mind quiet and in silence, he will then consciously awaken out of his physical body, elevating himself into inspirational knowledge.
The Aquarian Message, 1960 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Dr. Krumm Heller advised, also, that for the exercises of leaving in the astral, it was very convenient to perfume the room or bedroom with good incense, or rose essence, etc.
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
A practice
7. The disciple must profoundly meditate on his physical body while lying down on his bed with his hands crossed over his chest. He will tell himself: “I am not this physical body.”
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
5. It is urgent for our Gnostic disciples to learn how to function without any type of material vehicles so that they can perceive all the marvels of the universe with the eye of Dagma.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
8. The disciple must then profoundly meditate on his ethereal body, telling himself: “I am not this ethereal body.”
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
9. Then, submerged in profound internal meditation, the disciple must reflect on his astral body, and must say: “I am not the astral body.”
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
10. The disciple must now meditate on his mental body and must say to himself: “Neither am I this mind with which I am thinking.”
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
11. The disciple must then reflect on his willpower, and must tell himself: “Neither am I this body of willpower.”
Igneous Rose, 1954 also in Desire and Will
A practice
12. The disciple must now meditate in his consciousness, and must say to himself: “Neither am I the consciousness.”
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
13. Now, at last, submerged in profound meditation, the disciple must exclaim in his heart: “I am the Intimate, I am the Intimate, I am the Intimate.” 14. Once out of all his vehicles, the disciple will then be an indivisible majesty of the Infinite.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
15. He will then see that he does not need to think because the wisdom of the Intimate is: Yes, Yes, Yes. 16. The disciple will now be aware that the action of the Intimate is: Yes, Yes, Yes. 17. The disciple will now understand that the nature of the Intimate is absolute happiness, absolute existence, and absolute omniscience. 18. In these instances of supreme happiness, past and future join within an eternal now. The great cosmic days and the great cosmic nights are taking place, one after the other, within an eternal instance. 19. In this plenitude of happiness our disciples can study all the wisdom of the fire within the blazing flames of the universe.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practiceNight 19
3rd If you find yourself dreaming that you are at a certain place and you awaken, then do not move, become sleepy once again, with your imagination set on the aforementioned place, feeling yourself there again as if trying to continue the dream just as it was unfolding, while you cling to that place of the dream with thy Will. Imagination and Will united in vibrant harmony is the key to this clue. 4th At the time of falling asleep, concentrate thy imagination and thy Will intensely, united in vibrant harmony, on a certain place or location. Concentration should be perfect and then begin walking with faith in the “imagined” place. You should not imagine that you are imagining, because the experiment will then fail. One should really feel oneself at the imagined place and totally forget the bedroom.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition, Zodiacal Course
A practiceNight 19
This experiment should be done during the state of transition between vigil and sleep and once at that place, kneel and ask thy own internal God to take you to the Holy Gnostic Church, which is the great Cathedral of the Soul and the temple in which the Solar Logos, our Lord, the Christ, officiates.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practiceNight 20
There is a key for travelling in the astral body which is very swift; upon awakening from normal sleep, one closes the eyes without moving, and with the eyes closed one vividly imagines any place (but do not imagine that you are imagining). It must be translated into fact. If you feel completely sure of being in the imagined place, Will and Imagination are thus united and it is logical that this Union being attained, the result will be Triumph. Put the Imagination into play, take a walk in the place that you are imagining with “faith”. If one does this practice and attains the interplay of Will and Imagination (which is feminine), without moving in bed, maintaining sleep and imagining the place, putting into activity the Will, and with decision getting up from the bed, one will then be able to go wherever one wishes. On one occasion I found myself in a wood and whilst going along a track, I was told about a mountain. Because it was a dangerous place, I went to investigate it in Astral. I imagined the mountain, I saw mist, some steps, and a group of adepts. On entering that place they gave me a spoonful of bees honey, the food of the White Lodge, and the Bread of Wisdom. Later I was told that I would be purged with castor oil to cleanse my stomach. The next day I went out of the body whose stomach had been cleansed. I saw the stars, and practised the Rune MAN: the adepts commanded me to descend to the Worlds of the Infernos. I entered the region of profound darkness where I was attacked by terrible beasts. They were my “Ps” - I had to go through doors that I could barely pass, along narrow paths, and from here I went out through a cemetery. All that which is of the ego is death and misfortune; it is Mephistopheles. One must work very hard.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
One must distinguish between Intentional Imagination and Mechanical Imagination; obviously Mechanical Imagination is the same as Fantasy. The key of power rests in uniting Will and Imagination in Vibrant Harmony.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
My friend, faith works miracles. The Divine Master Jesus said: “Have faith like a mustard seed and you will move mountains.” It is clear that upon vividly imagining yourself to be next to the bed of the sick, you produced an unfoldment. Your soul traveled toward the sick and with the help of the Divine Master you healed the patient. Do not be surprised, then, that they have seen you. When the soul unfolds, it often makes itself visible even at remote distances. Have you not heard Saints spoken of who did the same, who in a state of ecstasy during prayer were seen in other places healing the sick? 4. At another meeting, in which there were healings, a woman approximately 60 years of age arrived, who had some very deep knife wounds on her arms and who showed all those present. Afterwards the Master did conjurations and we all pronounced the words that he was saying; subsequently he had us sit down.
Beyond Death also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
As an exercise, project yourself out of your body and try to feel as if you are in a park, that you are a little bird that jump among the branches of a tree that you have at your sight. On another day, try to feel that you are that tree. On another day, feel that you are the little flower of the meadow that you step upon with your feet. On another occasion, feel that you are a cloud, then, a drop of dew, a stone. Confirm that you are not your body, that you are the Divine Innermost dwelling within your body.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Do not forget the clue: Take advantage of the somnolent state that exists between vigil and sleep, so that with willpower, you may project from within yourself your astral body, your discernment and your memory. By your own will you will know the great mysteries of life and death within this triangle.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973 also in Desire and Will, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
In order to interpret your dreams, read the book of Daniel in the Bible.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Stand up in a steady position with your sight towards the East. Raise your arms above your head and place the palms of your hands together, then move your extended arms down towards your sides to form a cross with your body (your arms out to either side, the rest of your body standing straight); then after, cross you arms over your chest and lie down dorsal decubitus (on your back). When you feel you are falling asleep, with a sincere prayer ask your God and the Masters to take you to the great pyramid of Giza in Egypt. Immediately after finishing your prayer, vocalize the following syllables: FAAAAAAAA RAAAAAAA OOOOONNNNN Each one of the sounds of these syllables has a slight variation; they correspond to the natural “fa” of the musical scale that resounds in all of nature. The syllable “on,” changing the “n” with the “m,” is vocalized by the Yogis before and after their meditations.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Kalusuanga, the primeval God of light, will joyfully admit into his Mysteries the souls who are thirsty for the Mayan Ray. The clue in order to enter into the temple of Kalusuanga, the Mayan Indian Master, is the following: The disciple will sit on a chair before a table. He will place his elbows on the table and will hold his head with his left hand. Meanwhile, he will perform magnetic passes by passing his right hand over his head from the forehead to the neck, with the purpose of magnetizing himself. Thus, with force, he will thrust (with the magnetic passes) his astral body outwards, towards the temple of ‘Buritaca’, which is the headquarters of the ancient wisdom of the Mayan Ray.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The disciple will unite his willpower and imagination in vibrating harmony and will make the effort to fall asleep. He must feel, while utilizing his willpower and imagination, as if he was with the body of flesh and bones within the temple of ‘Buritaca’.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
He must pronounce with his thought the following mantras or magical words: OMNIS BAUN IGNEOUS. These words are pronounced in succession, prolonging the sound of the vowels until falling asleep.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A while later, after some time of practice, the disciple will leave his physical body in his Astral body, and Kalusuanga, the sublime master of the Mayan Ray, will instruct him in the sacred Mayan mysteries. Kalusuanga tests the courage of the invoker, and appears gigantic and terrible in order to test the disciple. If the disciple is courageous, he will be instructed in the sacred science of the "Mamas."
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
IIReconquer this faculty through daily Meditation
Why some students fail with the keys, and the remedy he gives: meditation combined with drowsiness, and waking the heart and the other centres used for leaving the body.
I am convinced that “theories” do nothing but ruin the occult powers of man; I have been able to confirm this in practice. To many I have been teaching the practice of “astral unfolding”, and those who had not weakened their minds with so many theories, could easily learn how to go in and out of their physical body at will, but the spiritualist parrots found this “very difficult”, because they had weakened their minds by the silliness of the intellect; they had broken their mental bodies and thus lost all their powers.
Secret Notes of a Guru, 1952
In all our works we have taught different systems to go out in the astral body. Many people have learned to go out and many have not learned. Some have read a key from our books, have understood it, put it into practice and then have immediately learned to go out in the astral body. Many others have practised with one or another system without having obtained anything.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
In practice we have been able to prove that people who are very intellectual, full of bookish culture (the library book worms), do not manage to go out at will in the astral body. On the other hand, peo ple who are very simple, humble peasants, poor servants of families can do so perfectly. This has made us think a great deal about the matter and we have carefully investigated the problem. The fact is that travel in the astral body is not something intellectual. Rather, astral travel is more aligned to the feeling, and to the superior emotion. These qualities are related to the heart and not to the brain. The intellectual polarises himself exaggeratedly in the brain and abandons, in fact, the world of the heart. The result of his lack of equilibrium is the loss of the psychic powers of the Soul. Unfortunately, a faculty cannot be acquired without the loss of another. Whoever wants to develop the intellect does so at the expense of the psychic faculties. This problem is serious because we can in no way approve ignorance and illiteracy. It is logical that an intellectual culture is necessary. Ignorance leads to very serious errors. An illiterate and ignorant occultist, can become a mythomaniac or slanderer, and in the worst cases, an assassin. In the astral world we find the perverse doubles of saintly people. Facing the Angel Anael, is his perverse double, the terrible demon Lilith. Facing Elohim Gibor, is the terrible demon Andramelech. Facing every good citizen is a citizen of evil. The worst of this is that the appearance of the double is exactly the same as the Model of Light. If an Adept teaches White Magic, his double, the black adept, besides having a similar physiognomy, manners, posture etc., teaches black magic. This is very serious and the ignorant occultist can very easily mistake his left hand for his right, in fact becoming a slanderer of good people, and we repeat, even an assassin. If an ignorant occultist finds his wife in the astral world cohabiting with one of his friends, and if he is unfortunately a schizophrenic or neurasthenic, he can assassinate his friend and his wife. His ignorance does not allow him to under stand, what he has seen is a pair of doubles cohabiting, or a fact from a past reincarnation etc., etc. Somebody who is jealous and supposes that his wife is unfaithful with some known or unknown person can then project his thought forms and see them in the astral world. If the subject is a neurasthenic, or an ignorant schizophrenic, but knows how to go out in the astral body, he can take everything that he saw seriously, and then commit murder, confused by his jealousy and visions. Because he is ignorant, he does not understand that he has seen his own mental forms projected unconsciously. All this leads us to the conclusion that intellectual culture is necessary. Now the interesting thing is to know how to reconquer the lost psychic faculties. A man with a brilliant, illuminated intellect and with all his psychic faculties in full activity really is in fact and right fully, a true illuminate. The occultist needs to establish perfect equilibrium between mind and heart. When the mind has become exces sively frozen in the brain, leaving at will in the astral body becomes completely impossible because there is imbalance. It is urgent then, that the intellectual occultists reestablish the equilibrium between mind and heart. Fortunately, there is a technique to reestablish the lost equilibrium. This technique is inner meditation. For those intellectuals who write to us saying that they have not been able to leave in the astral body with the clues that we have taught, we prescribe a good daily dose of inner meditation. It is urgent that they drink the wine of meditation from the cup of per fect concentration.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
Constantly we listen to complaints from many students who suffer because while the physical body is sleeping, they live unconscious in the superior worlds. Some of them have done many esoteric practices to achieve astral unfoldment and have not succeeded. When we examine the lives of such complainers, we discover within them the Fool of the Tarot. Those people are full of desires; it is only by understanding sensations that we kill desire. It is only by annihilating desire that the mind is liberated; the mind that normally is embottled in the bottle of desire. Liberating the mind produces the awakening of consciousness. The Fool of the Tarot is the Psychological “I”, the “self”, the reincarnating “Ego”. If we want to put an end to the causes of desire, we must begin to live in a state of constant vigilance. It is urgent to live in the state of alert perception, alert novelty. The “I” is a great book, a book of many volumes. It is only by means of the method of Internal Meditation that we can study that book.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah also in Desire and Will
1. Those who cannot come out in the Astral body owe it to having lost the faculty and then they have to reconquer this faculty through daily Meditation.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
There are many disciples who in spite of having known many clues to come out in the astral body, did not succeed at learning to come out at will. The failure of these students is due to them having already lost the powers of the astral body. Those students have no other remedy but to subject themselves to the discipline of meditation in order to recover the lost powers. Meditation is a technique to receive information. When the sage sinks into inner meditation, what he seeks is information. The chakras enter into activity with meditation.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Meditation comprises of three phases: First: Concentration Second: Meditation Third: Samadhi.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
3. When the magician submerges himself in meditation, he abandons his physical body and he can converse with the sidereal Gods.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
8. SHAMADI: (Ecstasy). If the disciple has been able to fall asleep meditating on his INNER SELF, then he enters the state of Shamadi and he can see and hear ineffable things and converse with the angels in a familiar manner. It is in this way that he awakens conscience from its millenary lethargy. It is in this manner that we can acquire flue divine wisdom, without the need of harming the powers of the Mind with the battle of reasoning, or with vain intellectualisms. Meditation is the daily bread of the sage. 9. With Meditation our Astral body is transformed, our astral experiences are made clear during the hours of sleep and in this way man reconquers his faculties and learns to come out in the Astral body at will. 10. Then he will be able to use, with success, the clues that we gave in the chapter of GIMEL or The Empress.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
6. DHARANA: (Concentration). We should separate the mind from all types of earthly thoughts. “Earthly thoughts should fall dead before the doors of the temple.” One has to concentrate the mind only on within... on our INNER SELF. 7. DYANA: (Meditation). The disciple should meditate on those instants on the INNER SELF. The INNER SELF is the SPIRIT. “Remember that thy bodies are the temple of the living God and that the Most High dwells in us.” The disciple should fall asleep profoundly trying to converse with his INNER SELF.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
Sunk in profound meditation, we should provoke drowsiness; this profound drowsiness will take us to the Samadhi state. We will then exit the body without knowing how, or at what time. This is how we enter the internal worlds.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Before beginning our practice of Concentration, we should sit comfortably. We can also do this exercise in bed. We have to withdraw from the mind all types of earthly thoughts; these thoughts should fall dead at the doors of the temple. Before concentrating, we should make our minds blank to not think of anything. Having filled these requirements, we then begin our inner Concentration exercise. We separate our minds from the things of the physical world and we direct it inwards, towards the Inner-Self. Remember that your bodies are the temples of the Living God, that the Most High dwells in you. The Most High within us is the Inner-Self. We have to love the Inner-Self. We have to adore the Inner-Self. We have to pay homage to the Inner-Self. We have to profoundly meditate on the Inner-Self.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Dreams are legitimate inner experiences. If we want to study a plant, we concentrate on it, we meditate on it; we provoke drowsiness and fall asleep. Then, in the vision of dreams we see how the plant becomes a beautiful child, or a beautiful creature. This creature is the Elemental of the plant. We can converse with that plant Elemental. We can inform ourselves about the properties of that plant, about its magical powers, etc. The plant Elemental will answer these questions and in this manner we will receive information. Meditation will awaken our occult powers. Meditation will provoke fundamental changes in the astral body. Then during normal sleep, there will be instants in which we will be conscious, and later we will be able to say, “I am out of the physical body, I am out of the physical body.” In this manner we will acquire “continuous Consciousness” little by little. Finally, the day will arrive when the student will be able to utilize our clues to come out at will in the astral body. He will have got his lost powers. During the hours of sleep, all human beings travel in the astral body. Dreams are the astral experiences. We should learn to remember astral experiences. When we wake up from sleep, we will practice a Retrospective Exercise in order to remember all those things that we did during sleep. During sleep, our disciples transport themselves to the White Lodges. During sleep, our disciples travel to remote places. All our disciples should learn how to interpret dreams. Even the most absurd dreams are absolutely symbolic.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
Internal experiences are interpreted by basing ourselves on the Law of Philosophical Analogies, on the Law of the Analogy of Opposites, on the Law of Correspondences and on Numerology. The one who wants to advance in these studies should untiringly study the Book of Daniel in the Bible. Daniel’s system teaches us how to interpret inner experiences.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
During sleep all of us move within the astral body, yet unconsciously; this happens so that the ethereal body can have the opportunity to repair the weakened physical body. However, you must learn how to consciously travel within the astral body at will and as frequently as you wish. We will submit you to the ordeals within the astral plane so that we can get to know your qualities and defects. Nevertheless, if in spite of all the exercises that we have given you, you cannot travel within your astral body at will, then we recommend that you practice internal meditation tenaciously. This is how you will recuperate the natural power of controlling your astral body, a power that you have lost for now.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Before falling asleep, lay down on your bed and perform the following for no less than thirty minutes each day for at least seven days: feel that the sacred fire of the Holy Spirit is penetrating your body through the pineal chakra. Thus during its descent, your pituitary, laryngeal, cardiac and solar chakras will be put into motion accordingly; keep descending towards your prostatic (uterine) chakra making it spin from left to right (clockwise), thus making it shine with a beautiful resplendence of a lotus of fire in movement.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
The Oriental concentrates mentally and meditates on the ten mystic sounds. The Oriental mind absorbs itself in the ten mystic sounds. Hence, the yogi’s “Nissus Formativus” or the Astral Body of the medieval doctors (within which there are all the psychic and spiritual principles of the human being), leaves the physical body in ecstasy within the ten mystic sounds of the heart. This is the Samadhi of the Hindustani yogis. Thus, this is how the yogi transports himself to the most distant worlds of the Infinite. Instead of laughing and criticizing these matters that they have neither studied nor experimented, the occidental scientists should study the yoga.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957
Whoever learns to quiet the mind, to concentrate the mind and pray can practice perfect meditation and reach the heights of internal contemplation. On reaching these heights we are in ecstasy. We can talk face to face with the ineffable gods, study the marvels of the infinite cosmos and travel through the infinite in spirit and soul. In that state of ecstasy the physical body remains asleep and abandoned. Now you will comprehend why it is convenient to practice these exercises during instances of drowsiness. Sleep is a power that should be taken advantage of to consciously achieve ecstasy.
Introduction to Gnosis
A practice
If in spite of all the clues which we have taught in order to consciously travel in Astral body you have not achieved it yet, then do not feel discouraged. Study chapters 16 to 21 of my book entitled: The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac. I promise you, beloved reader, that if you submit yourself to the discipline written in those cited chapters, then you will learn how to consciously travel through the Suprasensible Worlds.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
What is important is to perform everything correctly and to not dismay in your efforts. Then you will triumph.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The Hindu description of this chakra is marvellous. The number of its petals is mentioned, the principle of air (Vayu), Siva, the sexual force, with its lingain and the crescent Moon etc., indicating the heart as an altar of mental worship, the marvellous centre of meditation. Upon this Hindu paragraph, many a volume could be written. The cardia is the magnetic centre related to astral journeys. Who ever wants to conquer the power to leave in the astral body at will, must change his vibratory type. This is only possible by developing the cardia.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Elemental Magic
Superior emotion is needed to leave at will in the astral body; a certain type of emotive nature, of sentiment, a very special supra-sensitivity, and sleep combined with meditation. These qualities are only achieved with the development of the cardia.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
He who meditates daily on the hidden Banalinga undoubtedly attains the psychic powers called Khechari (to move through the air in the astral body, or to acquire also the power of putting the body in the state of Jinas) and Bhüchari (to go at will anywhere in the world).”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
The devotee should concentrate on his heart, imagining there thunder and lightning, fast moving clouds that are lost in the twilight, blown by strong hurricanes. The Gnostic should imagine many eagles flying in that infinite space which is within, very deep within his heart. Imagine the profound forests of nature, filled with sun and life, the song of birds and the sweet and peaceful chirping of the crickets of the forest. The disciple should fall asleep imagining all of this. Imagine now that in the forest there is a throne of gold, upon which is seated the Goddess Kãkini, a very divine woman. The Gnostic should fall asleep meditating on this, imagining all this. He should practise one hour daily, but if he practises two or three or more hours daily, even better. He can practise seated in a comfortable arm chair, lying on the floor, or on his bed, with his arms and legs open both right and left as a five-pointed star. Sleep must be combined with meditation. One must have much patience. These marvellous faculties of the cardia are obtained with infinite patience. It is better that the impatient, who want everything straight away, who do not know how to persevere their whole life should leave, be cause they are of no use. Powers are not obtained by playing around; everything costs. Nothing is given to us as a gift.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition, The Perfect Matrimony
If you want to travel consciously in the internal worlds you must develop the chakra of the heart.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
Those who want to learn how to leave in the astral body at will, those who want to enter into the science of Jinas, to learn how to place themselves within the fourth dimension with the physical body and travel with their physical body to any place in the world with out needing an aeroplane; those who urgently need to awaken their clairvoyance and clairaudience, should concentrate their mind daily on the cardiac chakra and meditate profoundly on that marvelous centre. To meditate on this centre for one hour daily is marvelous. The mantram of this chakra is the vowel O, which is vocalized elongating the sound thus: OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
Many occultist students want internal illumination and suffer horribly because, in spite of many years of study and esoteric practices they remain as blind and unconscious as when they began to read the first books. We, the Brothers of the Temple know through our own experience, that the cardiac chakra is definitive for internal illumination. The Shiva Samhitä, a great Hindustani book, speaks at great length about the benefits obtained by the yogi on meditating on the chakra of the tranquil heart: “The yogi acquires immense knowledge, knows the past, the present and the future; he has clairaudience and clairvoyance and can go through the air wherever he pleases. He sees the Adepts and the yogini Goddesses; he obtains the faculty called khecari (to move through the air) and bhüchari (to go at will to all corners of the world).”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
During the practice given here one should pray to the Christ, asking him to awaken the chakra of the heart.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
149. By awakening this Liver chakra, everyone can enter and leave the physical body at will.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
A practice
Many beings live in the Ultra of Nature, in the fourth dimension, with their Solar Astral Bodies. The oriental sages state that they have cognizance of those beings thanks to their prostatic chakra. These great sages of Hindustan concentrate daily on their prostatic chakra. They imagine that their chakra rotates from left to right like a magnetic wheel, while vocalizing the letter “M” with the lips closed. The letter “M” sounds as if imitating the bellowing of a bull, but without that deepness of voice. This is a profound and vibrating sound. This practice will awaken the prostatic chakra if it is practiced daily through many years.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
When the prostatic chakra enters into activity, it grants us the power to leave the physical body, to move in the Astral Body. This is how we are able to move in the Astral Body independent of physical matter. In the Astral Body, the human being can investigate for himself the great mysteries of life and death. The prostatic chakra grants us the power of astrally projecting the personality. The peyote is a Mexican cactus that produces the projection of the human personality. With the peyote, any human being can project himself in the Astral Body consciously.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957
A practice
The Prostate Chakra grants the power to travel consciously in the Astral Body. Every student should possess that power, if not, it is compulsory to awaken this Chakra. EXERCISE FOR THE PROSTATE CHAKRA The disciple should submerge himself into profound meditation on the Prostate Chakra; imagine that Chakra as a Lotus Flower, or as a magnetic disc which spins from left to right; at the same time, vocalize the letter M, as in the beginning of a bull’s moo but it should be sustained, long and without decadence, with a deep inhalation of air to then provoke that sound while having the lips hermetically sealed, until the last particle of breath is exhaled, as follows: MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM With these four series of Mantrams, the student becomes a practical Theurgist.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
The transmutation of the creative energy corresponds to the number 3. The splenic chakra is the centre of the Etheric Body, the life of the Sun enters our organism here. During the night the splenic chakra gathers the energies left by the Sun during the day. With that energy the splenic chakra transmutes the white corpuscles into red corpuscles. During the day the organic wastes obstruct the nerve channels of the Great Sympathetic nervous system. During sleep the vital energy makes the chakra there rotate, and this in turn uses the energy of the Sun. It passes to the spleen transmuting the white corpuscles into red. The energy passes to the solar plexus and is distributed throughout the whole nervous system. The thyroid gland cooperates, disinfecting the whole organism. It is clear that when the ego (lunar Astral ) returns, the organism will have been repaired, and we feel in better health. When one gets up feeling very tired, it means that the organism is ill. The hepatic chakra serves for astral projection. The Astral Body is con nected with the liver. By awakening the chakra of the liver anyone can enter and leave the Physical Body at will. The splenic, hepatic and solar plexus are developed with the Egyptian mantram FE-UIN-DAGH One chants on the note Mi, thus developing the three chakras and the lungs.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
The Great Master Hilariux IX, Knight of the Holy Grail, Prince of Jerusalem and Guardian of the Temple, has said that tracing the Sign of the Infinite focused on the Frontal Chakra and meditating on the Sacred Order of Tibet, the esoteric student will “leave” his body consciously and project himself into the Astral and at any moment, he makes himself present, after being submitted to numerous tests, he is delivered from “mouth to ear” the magnificent “ARCANE A.Z.F.” F. + A. = C: Effectively, Fire plus Water is equal to Conscience. Of course the Fire and Water of the Ninth Sphere, of Sex as instrument of Sanctification has the power to awaken the Conscience of the student in the Internal Worlds (F. + A. = C.).
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
IIt is sufficient to go to sleep mentally pronouncing the powerful mantram FARAON
The mantram FARAON: its syllables and how to sound them, the Chac Mool posture, and the eggshell used with it.
A practice
In Egypt, the Master learned how to travel in the astral body by vocalizing FARAON. It is in this manner that he came out in the astral body. The Master lay down in his bed in exactly the same manner that the Aztecs represented Chac Mool, the god of rain. He rested his head on a pillow and lulled himself to sleep, while vocalizing the mantram FARAON. When vocalizing this mantram, it is divided into three syllables; the first is the FA that resounds in all of nature. The second is the Egyptian RA. The third is the ON which reminds us of the famous mantram OM of the Hindus.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
The Master lulled himself to sleep, mentally vocalizing this mantram. It is important to prolong the sound of each of the letters, which form the mantram FARAON.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The physical body falls asleep and the soul heads towards the inner planes with the consciousness awake; this is how we travel in the astral body at will. The Pharaoh of Egypt gave Jesus a sacred esoteric medal, which consisted of some small wings that symbolized the igneous wings; this medal was placed over his heart.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The tomb of Chac Mool was located and his remains found. There fore, there can be no doubt that Chac Mool really existed. If one observes the manner in which Chac Mool is reclining, one sees that he is resting in the same position that the Egyptian Initiates assumed when they wanted to leave in the astral body while pronouncing the mantram FA-RA-ON. Nevertheless, something curious appears in the umbilical region of Chac Mool. It is a wide bowl or receptacle as if to receive something. In fact, the solar plexus is marvelous; and Chac Mool left humanity a great teaching.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
The name of this Aztec sculpture is FARAON, a name whose syllables are divided as follows: fa-ra-on. When properly vocalized, they are a mantra that makes the astral body (of the one who pronounces them) separate from their physical body and soar within space towards the great pyramid of Giza in Egypt.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practiceNight 9
KEY TO GO INTO ASTRAL CONSCIOUSLY The key to go into astral is very simple. It is sufficient to go to sleep mentally pronouncing the powerful mantram FARAON. This man tram is divided into three syllables; FA-RA-ON. When the devotee finds he is in that state of transition which exists between vigil and sleep, he will go within : by means of conscious self-reflection and then will gently get up from his bed, completely identified with his light and fluid Spirit, in the astral body every devotee can attend the Pretor. People, who have not yet engendered the Christ Astral, suffer a great deal because they are unable to learn to go into astral, other than with many hardships and much work. Those who have engendered the Christ Astral in past reincarnations, leave the physical body with great ease. KEY TO TAKE THE PHYSICAL BODY INTO A STATE OF JINAS The disciple will concentrate on the Master Oguara. The disciple should fall asleep reciting this prayer: “I believe in Christ, I believe in Oguara, Bãbãji, Mãtãji and the Jinas Masters. Take me out of my bed with the physical body. Take me to the Gnostic Church with my physical body in the state of Jinas.”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
There is an instant when we can abandon our physical body at will. That instant is when we find ourselves falling asleep. In those moments of transition between vigil and sleep, every human being, wrapped in his or her astral body, escapes the physical body. There is a clue, which allows us to consciously escape from the physical body, to work in the Superior Worlds. The Divine Master, Jesus Christ utilized this clue, when he studied in the pyramid of Kephren. The Great Master used to lie on his bed, face up, horizontally, with the soles of his feet placed on the bed, and his knees raised. Next the Master raised his arms above his head until the palms of his hands touched each other; then he ex tended them to the right and left; and finally, crossed them over his chest thus forming the Microcosmic Star. Next, the Master lulled himself to sleep vocalizing the powerful Mantram “FARAON”. That Mantram is vocalized in three syllables, as follows: FAAAAA...RAAAAA...ONNNNN...
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
A practice
The Master vocalized this Mantram many times, until he fell asleep. Then, in the Internal Worlds we awaken consciousness. We feel subtle... We float deliciously... This procedure, simple and easy, is a marvelous key, which will allow us to awaken consciousness in the Superior Worlds.
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
A practice
The disciple should lull himself to sleep while, at the same time, he vocalizes the Mantram FARAON distributed in three syllables, as follows: FFFFFAAAA... RRRRAAAA… OOOOONNNN...
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practiceNight 10
The vocalization of the Letter R has already been explained. The disciple should lie down, horizontally, face up. He will place the palm of the hands extended without rigidity, on the surface on the bed, knees bent upwards, with the sole of the feet resting on the bed. The entire body should be relaxed, limb by limb. With everything in this manner, the disciple will lull himself to sleep and, taking deep breaths, will vocalize the Mantram FARAON.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
Once the disciple is asleep, he will inevitably come Out of the Physical Body without knowing how, or when. Once in the Internal Worlds, in the Fourth Dimension where his Astral Body will irresistibly be projected, he wilt awaken total consciousness; in other words, he will become aware of his unheard of experiences in those worlds and will be able to dedicate himself to the practice of Theurgy.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
But, before lying down, he should do the sign of the Microcosmic Star. To that effect, the arms are raised upwards until the palms of the hands touch each other above the head. Next, they are extended laterally so that they remain in a horizontal position, forming a Cross with the rest of the body; lastly, the forearms are crossed over the chest, touching this region with the palms, while the fingertips reach the front of the shoulders. Our adorable Savior of the World, Jesus the Christ, used this mysterious Clue not revealed until now by us, when He studied in the Pyramids of Kephren.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
FARAON Ida is masculine and Pingala is feminine. Here are the sharps and flats of the Great FA that resounds in nature. FA corresponds to the Solar atoms, RA to the Lunar atoms, ON to the flaming Fire that ascends through the central channel. It is necessary to learn how to sound these sharps and flats with the powerful mantram FARAON, in order to go out in the astral body consciously and positively.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
With the mantram of these sharps and flats we can travel in the astral body.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practiceNight 10
The position in which Jesus lay down to go into astral was like that of Chac Mool, but with the head very low and without pillows, the soles of the feet upon the bed, the legs bent and the knees raised. In this way, the Great Hierophant would fall asleep playing on his marvellous lyre, the spinal column. The whole mantram FARAON is divided into three syllables, thus: FA - RA - ON. The FA is that of the musical scale. The RA is a deep sound; it should be vocalised with a rolling R. ON reminds us of the mantra OM of India, but the only difference is that here, instead of having the consonant M, it has the consonant N; ON. In general, we can give to the mantram FARAON all the intonation which resounds in all creation with the Great FA. We advise you to vocalise mentally. The disciple should fall asleep singing this mantram with the Imagination and Will concentrated on the pyramids of Egypt. It requires practice and much patience.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition, The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
The Egyptian mantram which is used for astral projection is the following: “FARAON”. This mantram is vocalised in those moments of transition between waking and sleep, having the mind upon the pyramids of Egypt.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
The correct pronunciation of this mantram is: FAAAAAARRRRRAAAAAAOOOOOONNNNNN.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
This mantram is for astral projection, and as we have already said, it is pronounced during the states of transition between being awake and asleep, concentrating the mind upon the pyramids of Egypt. However, the disciples who do not have the power to project the Astral Body must first acquire it by vocalisirig the mantram “EGIPTO” for an hour daily, as we have already stated.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
133. The sleep process breaks the very strong connections, which exist in the vigil slate. 134. The sleep process permits the soul to separate itself from the physical body. 135. The disciple will be able to lull himself to sleep by vocalizing the mantram “FARAON” like this: FAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA…..
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
RRRRRRRRRRAAAAAAAAAAAAA… OOOOOOOOOONNNNNNNNNNNN…
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
136. Concentrate your whole mind on the Pyramids of Egypt. 137. When the disciple finds himself dozing, he should rise from his room en route to the pyramids of Egypt.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
The egg is truly a marvelous substance. Esoteric experiments, highly scientific, in relation with the unfoldment of the human personality, prove that the shell of the egg has certain occult powers which facilitate astral unfoldment (travel).
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
The key consists in reducing an eggshell to powder. The disciple will apply these powders over the chest and armpits; he will then lie down on his bed, and cover himself properly with his blankets. The student will then lull himself to sleep, pronouncing the mantram “FARAON”, like this: FAAAAAAAAA RAAAAAAAAAA ONNNNNNNNNN This can be pronounced mentally, and when the student feels that he has become numb, he should rise from his bed and head towards the Gnostic Church.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
The second syllable “Ra”, corresponds to a very ancient mantram that vibrates all the chakras of the astral body; this mantram is not pronounced with “r” but with “rr” instead, like this: rrrrrrrrraaaaaaaaa. And the last syllable “On” corresponds to the “Hindu” mantram Om, but is here pronounced as: Onnnnnnnnnnnn.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
The first syllable “Fa” corresponds to the Chinese Gong, or the musical fa which resounds in the entire creation. We have to pronounce this note to become attuned with mother nature.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
This mantram “FARAON” can be vocalized with the mind or better yet, with the heart. Therefore, the powerful Egyptian mantram “Faraon” serves to “travel” in the astral body. EXERCISE The following exercise should be practiced during the sign of Capricorn: A coffin should be imagined on the floor and the disciple should walk over this imagined coffin but leaving it between his legs, and he will walk with bent knees as if to clear an obstacle, and making the knees spin from left to right, with the intention that they become charged with the lead of Saturn, such as our great guru “Huiracocha” taught us It is also urgent to practice the exercises of internal meditation daily, praying to our “INNER BEING” to transport himself to the sidereal temples to bring before us the principal genii of that constellation, so that they may awaken the chakras and powers of the knees.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition, Zodiacal Course
The reader, who has closely followed the entire course of our investigations, will comprehend that Spiritualism, with its mediums or Necromancy, with its laboratories, would not have served us to carry out these transcendental Invocations of High Theurgy. Unfortunately, there are many students who would like to see, hear, touch and feel these things but their complementary faculties are damaged. Many are the people who would like to consciously “leave” in the astral body, and suffer the unutterable because they do not achieve it. The clue, which we gave in our First Chapter, with the Mantram “FARAON”, is formidable. The important thing is to never give up: to persevere, not to become tired, until one succeeds. During the normal hours of sleep, every human body is outside the physical body. The Inner being intervenes in the internal worlds, to make us comprehend integrally all the processes of daily life, for example: business that we carried out during the day, words that we uttered, emotions we experienced, etc. Unfortunately, we live in an unconscious manner daily. We do not comprehend the triple reach (physical, psychic and spiritual), of each of our actions, of each of our words, of each one of our daily sentiments. Then the Inner Being intervenes during sleep to make us see in a symbolic form, the triple reach of all the events that we realize during our daily lives. Therefore, human souls move, during sleep, in that symbolism. Those symbols are the so-called DREAMS. If we lived completely conscious of each action of our daily lives, if we comprehended the triple reach of each act of our daily lives, if before going to sleep we were to do a retrospective exercise to make total and absolute “conscious conscience”, of a determined defect, then that defect disintegrates. We remain free of it! The important thing is, therefore, that the dreamer awakens in the Internal Worlds during nor mal sleep, during nocturnal sleep, without “mediumisms”, without “hypnotisms”, etc.
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening, Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
IIThis sound is similar to that of the cricket
The syllables LA and RA, and the sharp sound of the cricket that they bring up in the brain, with instructions to get up from the bed when it is heard.
A practice
144. Another very simple clue to come out in the Astral Body is the following: 145. The disciple should lull himself to sleep mentally pronouncing the syllable LA and the syllable RA. 146. When the disciple then feels within his brain a sweet and peaceful whistling, something similar to the brakes of compressed air or the singing of bugs, something like the sound of little flutes or flutes, the disciple should get up from his bed and head towards the GNOSTIC CHURCH.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
143. When the disciple is already falling asleep, he will rise from his bed and will come out of his room en route to the Gnostic Church.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
147. Many disciples succeed immediately others take months and years to learn how to get out in the Astral Body.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
148. The Astral Body is connected with the Liver.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
A practice
The one who wants to come out in the astral body at will should lull himself to sleep while mentally pronouncing the syllable “LA”. This syllable is mentally alternated with the syllable “R A”
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practiceNight 12
Mentally pronounce these two syllables in an alternated and separate manner. The student should try to listen to the sharp sound of the cricket. That sound emerges from within the cerebral cells. One needs a serene mind, a good quantity of drowsiness and good attention on what one is doing. If the exercise is well done, then as soon as the student enters that transitional state that exists between vigil and sleep, he will feel the sharp sound of the cricket within his cerebrum. The student should then lull himself to sleep a little more, and increase the resonance of that sound by means of the will; he should then rise from his bed heading towards the Temple of Chapultepec, or the Gnostic Church, or wherever he wishes. When we say that he should get up from his bed, this should be translated into deeds. The student should rise from his bed. This is not a mental exercise. Really, it is not a matter of mentally rising; the disciple should rise with actions, with deeds.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Nature will take care of separating the physical and the astral bodies, in order for the astral body to remain free and the physical body remains in the bed. What the student has to do is to get up from his bed, that is all. With this clue, our Gnostic disciples will be able to transport themselves in the astral body to the mystery temples of the White Lodge. It would be very interesting for disciples to have this little animal in their rooms. In this manner, they would concentrate better. If we concentrate on that sound, it will soon resound in our cerebrum. That little animal can be kept in small cages. With this clue we can attend the great temples of the White Lodge.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The director of the Temple of Chapultepec is Master Rasmussen.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
Two guardians with flaming swords guard the entrance of the temple. Only ancient wisdom is studied in that temple.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practiceNight 11
The human being can travel to any place in the world or in the infernos with his Astral Body. The key in order to consciously travel with the Astral Body is the following: Laying down on his bed, face up, the disciple must fall sleep while vocalizing the syllables “LA” “RA”.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practiceNight 11
The student will independently vocalize each syllable, that is to say, each syllable with a separate breath, as follows: LLLLLLLLLLLAAAAAAAAAAAA……RRRRRRRRRRRRRRAAAAAAAAAAAA The vocalization of these two sacred syllables must be done mentally.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
These two syllables have the power of making the sexual energy intensely vibrate. Thus, the disciple must fall asleep while vocalizing with tranquility in his bed. Thus, this is how the sexual energies, the creative energies of the Third Logos begin to vibrate when the student vocalizes these two syllables.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
These type of energies produce a sweet and subtle sound when they are intensely vibrating. This sound is similar to that of the cricket. The student must learn how to handle this sound, as this is the subtle voice which grants us the power to consciously travel with our Astral Body.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
The student must arise from his bed in those precise instants in which he hears this mystical sound and direct himself to any place in the world. This is not a matter of performing it mentally. What we are teaching here must be performed in a factual action. The disciple with his astral body, is actually detaching himself from the physical body. He then penetrates into the superior worlds in order to study the great mysteries of life and death. Whosoever wants to learn how to sing these two sacred syllables should listen to Mozart’s Magic Flute.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
Thus, this is how John the prophet was taken from his physical body and while being in the spirit was carried away in order to see the heavenly Jerusalem. “And he carried me away in the spirit to a great and high mountain, and shew me that great city, the holy Jerusalem, descending out of heaven from God.”
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
To cause the Subtle Voice, the Sound of Anahat, to resound in the cerebrum use the Sexual power of the two witnesses known in the Orient by the names of Ida and Pingala. The Anahat Sound is produced by the sexual energies in motion. It is already known that all motion produces sound. If one tries to cause the “Solar and Lunar atoms” of the seminal system to vibrate, the Anahat Sound will be produced louder, more intense, and will enable one to consciously leave in the Astral Body. Lull yourself to sleep, therefore, mentally vocalizing as follows: LAAAAAAAAAA... RAAAAAAAAA...
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
Therefore, the Solar Atoms resound with the Mantram: RA. The lunar atoms vibrate intensely with the Mantram: LA.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
LAAAAAAAAAA... RAAAAAAAAA... With these Mantrams, the aforementioned solar and lunar atoms will spin intensely like an electric whirlwind. Such motion produces the Anahat Sound with which the student can escape consciously from the Physical Body. The important thing is for him to get up while falling asleep, taking advantage of the mystical SOUND.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
Arcanum 10: The Wheel of Fortune. This is the Wheel of Samsara. Reincarnation! The incessant transmutation of the sexual force produces the anahata sound. With this sound we can go out in the astral body. When we want to listen to this mystical sound, we first vocalize the mantram “La,” alternating it with the mantram “Ra.” This is done mentally. When the sound is intense we can tranquilly go out in our astral body. And with the Arcanum A.Z.F., we free ourselves from evolution. For the man who has absolutely christified himself, evolution totally ceases to exist.
Magnus Opus also in Lust
In the Hill of Chapultepec exists an Aztec Temple in the “Jinas” state. We should now comprehend why this hill was considered sacred by the Aztecs. The indians of Mexico used to make long mystical pilgrimages to Chapultepec. By carefully observing the fragment of the Mexican codex of Chapultepec, we see two human beings floating by the hill. Those two beings are traveling in the astral body. Someone pronounces a note, which comes out of his lips as two light waves. That note is the sibilant and sharp sound of the cricket. That sound is the keynote of the Logos. The Logos sounds.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
In this picture, we see two individuals floating over the Hill of Chapultepec. A chirping cricket appears at the summit of the hill. Next to this scene, a floating human face appears; from the mouth emerges two waves of light which symbolize the chirping of the cricket, or in other words, the symbol for the monotonous and sharp sound of the cricket that the two people who are floating over the foothill must produce in order to penetrate into the temple.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
The chirping of the cricket is the “still voice” which Appolonius of Tyana utilized in order to depart in his astral body. This is the small, still voice which Elijah heard when he went out, “and stood in the entering in of the cave in the wilderness.” (Read 1 Kings 19: 12-14) The human being is a triad of body, soul and Spirit. A mediator between the Spirit and the body exists. This mediator is the body of the soul, the astral body. One possesses a soul, yet one is a Spirit.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practiceNight 12
When you perform your practices, concentrate on the sharp chirping of the cricket. This chirping must sound from within the smallest cells of your brain. If this practice is done correctly, you will soon be in that transition between vigil and slumber. Increase the slumber and the sound of the crickets’ chirping by using your willpower. Then get up from your bed and with complete confidence leave your bedroom and go towards the temple of Chapultepec, or wherever else you wish to go. You must try not to lose the lucidity of your consciousness.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973 also in Desire and Will
A practice
Do not mentally get up from your bed; instead, actually get yourself up. Nature will take charge of separating your astral body from your physical body. The physical body will remain sleeping in its bed and the astral body will become free to travel wherever you wish.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Without putting off the exercise delivered in the former chapter, lie down on your bed, and fall asleep while vocalizing the syllable LA; the intonation of this syllable corresponds to the natural note “fa” of the musical scale. You must prolong this syllable like this: LAAAAAAAAAAAAAA Immediately after, you must vocalize the syllable RA: RAAAAAAAAAAAAAA Chapter 5 Chac - Mool in the Aztec and Egyptian Cultures In the Museum of Anthropology and History in Mexico City there exists a stone figure of a man who is partially lying down in a dorsal decubitus position. The soles of his feet are resting on his bed; thus his knees are elevated. The backs of his thighs are pressed up against the backs of his calves because his legs are bent. His upper body is arched as if he may get up at his first impulse; his face is towards the left and his sight is fixed on the horizon. At the height of his solar plexus his hands hold a container.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
Within the human cerebrum, within its cells, the “SUBTLE VOICE” resounds incessantly. It is a sharp, hissing sound. It is the “SONG OF THE CRICKET,” die hissing of the “SERPENT,” the “SOUND OF ANAHAT.” The Voice of Brahma. It has ten tonalities, which the Theurgist should learn to listen to. The student’s mind should become absorbed in that SOUND, as the bee in the nectar of the flowers.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
When the mind is calm, in deep silence, the student can inevitably listen o the SOUND OF THE CRICKET: a subtle, sharp, penetrating sound. Even more than that — if the Soul is absorbed in that mystical sound, the Doors of Mystery open up for the student. Therefore, in those instants, rise from the bed, instinctively, and leave the room to head for the Temples of the White Lodge, or to any place of the Universe.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
Whoever attempts and decides to hear that mystical SOUND, let him keep his mind in silence, not silenced; we repeat IN SILENCE. Let us distinguish between a mind that is calm, because it has comprehended that it is useless to think; and an artificially calmed mind. Differentiate between a mind that is in spontaneous, natural silence, and one that has been silenced by force, violently.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
The student can lull himself to sleep vocalizing the letter S. Like a peaceful and sweet hiss: SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS. With the vocalization of the letter, he will acquire the capacity of resounding, in his brain, the SUBTLE VOICE, the SOUND OF ANAHAT, at will, which will allow him to leave consciously in the Astral Body.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
There exists a particular mystical sound that the yogi must learn to hear. The Aztecs knew this mystical sound. Let us remember the hill of Chapultepec. A cricket upon a hill is represented in a Mexican codex. In ancient Rome, during the time of the Caesars, the cricket was sold in golden cages at a very high price. Magicians of ancient Rome bought that little animal in order to use them in practical magic. If we have that little animal close to the head of our bed, and if we meditate on its delicious song, we will hear the still small voice in the instant of going to sleep. This phenomenon is equivalent to the phenomenon of two pianos that are equally tuned. If we play, for example, the note Ti on either piano, the other piano will repeat the same note without the touch of the human hand. This is a very interesting vibratory phenomenon that can be proven by anyone. This exact thing happens with the mysterious sound of the cricket. There exists in the human brain the musical sound that resounds when the little animal sings.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Feeding this little animal is not a problem. We know that it nourishes itself with vegetables and it also eats clothes found in family homes. People are afraid of it because no one wants to lose their clothes. This little animal can easily be found in the country hills.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
Whosoever hears the still voice can travel instantly in the astral body any time he wants. If the devotee concentrates on the sound of the cricket, or if the yogi meditates on the sound of the cricket and he goes to sleep while listening to that sound, suddenly the same mystic sound, the still small voice, will resound within his brain. Then the doors of the mystery will be opened. In those instants, the Gnostic can rise from his bed naturally and depart from his home in the astral body. This does not have to do with getting up with the mind, what we are saying must translate into actions. The devotee must rise from his bed with complete naturalness. Nature will act in those instants by separating the astral body from the physical body.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
When we are out of the physical body, we feel a delightful, spiritual voluptuousness. There is no greater pleasure than to feel the soul detached. In the superior worlds we can speak with the ineffable Gods. In the superior worlds we can study at the feet of the Master. This is how we liberate ourselves from so many theories. This is how we drink from the living fountain of knowledge.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
If the devotee wants to hear this mystic sound his concentration must be perfect. To begin with, the student will hear many sounds; yet, if he concentrates intensively on the sound of the cricket, eventually he will manage to hear it. Then he will attain victory. We inevitably attain illumination with this mystical sound.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
In the final synthesis this mystical sound is produced from the tranquil heart. The remote origin of this mystical sound must be searched for within the Divine Mother. The devotee must pray a lot, beseeching the Divine Mother to grant him the grace to hear the mystical sound.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
With the grace of the Divine Mother every devotee can have the joy of hearing the mystical sound that allows us to instantaneously project in the astral body. The devotee who wishes to carry out these practices with success must devote himself to internal meditation when he truly feels very sleepy. You must know that every esoteric exercise of meditation that lacks the factor of sleep is harmful, useless, sterile, because it damages the mind and harms the brain.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
If the Gnostic student unfortunately does not have the power of this marvelous little animal that we mentioned in this chapter, then he must resonate the letter S, like this: Ssssssss, like a very fine and delicate whistle (lips half-opened and upper and lower teeth together). Behind this very fine sound is found the still voice that permits us to project instantaneously in the astral body. The devotee should choose a very comfortable position for internal meditation. Next we are going to mention two very comfortable positions.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Return into your body so that you may keep working on your meditation and concentrate again on the astral body, the black column of your living temple. Try to hear the sharp sound of the cricket (of which we talked about in chapter four). This sharp sound is the essence of the lost word INRI. Thus, without missing a moment of listening to this sharp sound, (that is now emerging from within the cells of your brain) concentrate on the white column, your mental body. Do not stop, keep meditating. Now, concentrate on your body of willpower until you attain cognizance of it; thus, when you have realized that you are not that body either, discard it from your mind saying: “I am not my body of willpower either.” Now take another step ahead in your meditation. Concentrate on your body of consciousness; identify it and realize that you are not this body. That it is only another of your marvelous vehicles of expression, and discard it by saying: “I am not my body of consciousness either.” Then you will ask yourself: “Who am I?” A sweet and affable voice will answer you: “You are me, the Innermost, the reflection of the Inner Christ, you and I are one.” In those moments try to identify yourself with your Inner Christ, feel that you are him and say: “I am he... I am he... I am he...”
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973 also in Desire and Will
A practice
RRRRRRRRIIIIIIIIIIIII Thereafter, without your four material bodies, go and wander around the World of the Mist of Fire.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
16. The disciple will meditate profoundly on these two columns, which are the Astral and Mental bodies. The disciple “ slumber profoundly while mentally chanting the mantra INRI, prolonging the sound of each letter by imitating the sharp sound of the crickets of the forest, thus, until achieving that sound, until giving unto the letters that sharp sound, a sound synthesis like a prolonged “S,’ as follows: SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 17.It is necessary to identify oneself with that sibilant very sharp sound, similar to the most elevated note that a fine flute can give.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
14. The word INRI is written with characters of fire upon those columns.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
15. This word INRI is a password that allow us to pass between the two columns of the temple to function within the World of the Mist of Fire without material vehicles of any type.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
19. If we can have that little animal close to our ears and if we meditate profoundly in its sound, then the sharp note that the cricket emits would awake in our brain the same sound.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
20.Then we could rise from our bed with our Astral body and travel towards the Gnostic Church with complete consciousness.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
21. That is the subtle voice mentioned by Appolonius of Tyana. That is the still small voice that Elijah heard in the entrance in of the cave.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
22. Let us read some verses of the Bible: “And he said, Go forth, and stand upon the mount before the LORD. And, behold, the LORD passed by, and a great and strong wind rent the mountains, and brake in pieces the rocks before the LORD; but the LORD was not in the wind: and after the wind an earthquake; but the LORD was not in the earthquake: 23. “And after the earthquake afire; but the LORD was not in the fire: and after the fire a still small voice. 24. “And it was so, when Elijah heard it that he wrapped his face in his mantle, and went out and stood in the entrance of the cave. “And, behold, there came a voice unto him, and said, What doest thou here, Elijah?” KINGS 29: 11-13 25. The slumbering disciple will meditate profoundly on the black column (the Astral body) and will try to hear the still small voice, while saying: “I am not the Astral body.” 26. The disciple will then meditate profoundly on the white column (the Mental body) and will try to hear the still small voice, the subtle voice, the essence of INRI, the sibilant “S,” the sharp sound of the crickets from the forests; thus, while making the effort of falling asleep profoundly, he will discard the Mental body by saying: “I am not the Mental body.”
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
27. Now, the disciple will concentrate his entire mind on his Willpower, and will discard the body of Willpower by saying: “I am not Willpower either.” 28. Now let the disciple concentrate his mind on his Consciousness, on Buddhi (body of the Consciousness) and discard himself from that marvelous body by saying: “I am not the consciousness either.” 29. Now let the disciple concentrate himself in his Innermost, become profoundly asleep, take a totally infantile attitude and say: “I am the Innermost; I am the Innermost; I am the Innermost.” 30. Let the disciple slumber even deeper and say: “The Innermost is just the child of the Inner Christ.”
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955 also in Desire and Will
IIIAnother mantram to come out in the Astral Body
The S that whistles, RUSTI, TAI RE RE, OMNIS BAUM IGNEOS, EGIPTO and the Sanskrit mantram for astral projection, each with its practice.
A practice
11. The “S”, as a mantra, permits us to leave our cave (physical body) and to enter upon the mount (astral plane).
Igneous Rose, 1954
“And it was so, when Elijah heard it, that he wrapped his face in his mantle, and went out, and stood in the entering in of the cave. And, behold, there came a voice (hiss) unto him, and said, what doest thou here, Elijah?” (1 Kings: 19: 11-13)
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
12. The vowel “S” is a mantra for Astral Body projection.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practiceNight 13
13. The disciple must become sleepy while vocalizing the sweet and affable sound of the “S”. When the disciple reaches that state of transition between vigil and dream, then he must rise from his bed and leave the room, going towards the Gnostic Church.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
14. Once in the Gnostic Church, we will teach and instruct him in the Divine Wisdom. 15. However, we must clarify to our disciples that this explanation which we have given must be understood as an immediate action.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practiceNight 13
16. The student must rise up from his bed, as naturally as would a child who knows nothing of occultism. It is not a mental practice. It is a practice which must be understood as a concrete action, just as when we rise up in the morning in order to eat breakfast. 17. The vowel “S” has a terrific power.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
P, PATAR, PETER, sex and its Mysteries, cannot function without the Origo, the Principle, the substance that unites the Sulphur and the Mercury. S, the sweet and affable hiss (still small voice) that Elijah heard in the desert and that Apollonius utilized in order to willfully leave the physical body, is profoundly significant. We very well know that Apollonius was covered with a woolen mantle in order to practice.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
M or O, whose interpretation is A, is such because it is found in the Chaotic Sea of the Sacred Mercury. It is the Salt of the Great Ocean.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
An account
While seated, he concentrated on his navel. He begged his God to send the S, the sweet and affable hiss (still small voice), the subtle voice. When he had heard the sound that the cricket produces, he willfully left the physical body. This fine sound vibrates in the cerebellum, in the head. In order to hear the subtle voice, quietude and silence of the mind is needed. S is the Ray, the Fire that without O, ORIGO, Principle or Spirit, would be impossible to be because S is O, Spirit.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
The mystical note, the magic ‘S’ conferred to the old Hierophant the power of consciously projecting himself with his astral body.
Parsifal Unveiled, 1970
The disciples who cannot remember their astral experiences must submit their ethereal body to a surgical operation which the Nirmanakayas perform in the first hall of Nirvana (the first subplane of Nirvana referred to in Theosophy). After this operation, the disciple can take into his astral travels the ethers which he needs in order to bring back his memories.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
It is necessary for the disciple to learn how to take in his astral travels the beloved Maiden of our memories, in order to bring the memory of all that he sees and hears within the internal worlds. She serves as a mediator between the senses of the physical brain and the ultrasensible senses of the Astral body. She is like the storage of memory (if ‘storage’ as a concept fits here).
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
Light, heat, color and sound identify themselves with the luminous and reflective ethers. The sapient Soul expresses herself in these two ethers. She is the beloved Maiden of our memories. When seen clairvoyantly, this Maiden looks like a beautiful lady within the ethereal body.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Invoke your Intimate while in your bed, at the time of sleep, like this: “Father of mine, Thou who art my real Being, I beseech Thee with all of my heart and with all of my soul to take the beloved Maiden of my memories out from my ethereal body, with the goal of not forgetting anything when returning into my physical body.” Then, pronounce the mantras: “LAAAA RAAAA SSSSSSS” while becoming sleepy.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The letter ‘S’ must have a high pitched and sharp sound, similar to that which is produced by air brakes. When the disciple finds himself between vigil and dream, then he has to get up from his bed and leave his room and travel towards the Gnostic Church.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
This last action must be done as is, with confidence and faith, because it is real and not fictitious. Neither mentalism nor suggestion exist in this practice. You must get up very carefully from your bed, so as not to wake yourself. Then, you must leave your room by walking as naturally as you do when you travel to your work daily. Before leaving your room, you must perform a little jump with the intention of floating. If you float, then direct yourself towards the Gnostic Church, or to the house of the sick person whom you need to heal. Yet, if you do not float when performing the little jump, then, return into your bed and repeat the experiment. During this practice, do not worry about your physical body. Let Nature perform it, and do not doubt, because if you do so the experiment will be lost.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The Gnostic procedure in order to depart in the astral body is very simple.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practiceNight 14
The Gnostic takes advantage of the natural state of transition between vigil and dream in order to leave his physical body. This is done with much naturalness as when one is walking out of his home. The individual simply pronounces the mantra “RUSTI”, and in the moment when he is getting drowsy, he gets out of his bed, not with the mind, nor the imagination, but as if he is really doing it with his body of flesh and bones. Hence, the physical body remains within the bed. The mantra is pronounced many times like this: RRRRRRUUUUUUSSSSSSSSTIIIIIIIIIIII…..
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
138. Another mantram to come out in the Astral Body is the mantram “RUSTI”. 139. The disciple will vocalize this mantram mentally and when he is falling asleep he should rise from his bed and leave his room en route to the GNOSTIC CHURCH.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 15
141. The mantram “TAI RE RE RE”, also serves to come out in the Astral Body. 142. The disciple lulls himself to sleep singing this mantram with the mind.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
140. There be will be able to converse with the CHRIST personally and receive direct instruction from all the Masters.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 15
When the disciple is already falling asleep, when he finds himself in that precise state of transition between vigil and sleep, he should rise from his bed without hesitation, laziness, doubts, reasoning, naturally, like a reflex or in an instinctive manner, automatically, and absolutely childlike. Observe the birds: When they are going to fly, they do not reason about it, they do not harbor doubts nor preconceptions, but simply fly away instinctively; we can say: automatically. The disciple should proceed in that manner: imitate the birds. He should rise, therefore, from the bed and leave the room and head for any Corner of the infinite, or wherever he likes. When we say that the student should RISE from the bed, this should be translated into effective and immediate actions, without stopping to think.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Laziness
A practice
The syllable TAI is sung in a deep tone. The repetition of RE, in a higher tone than TAI.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
We now refer to the case of a gentleman who, while asleep, had to get up to open his house door, because he heard someone knocking on it at those moments. When he returned to his room he had the tremendous surprise of finding a man in his bed. On properly observing him, he realized very well that this man was his own body, which had remained asleep in the bed.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
From the previous reference, the students will be able to realize that when a man gets up from his bed in that precise moment of falling asleep, the result is inevitably “UNFOLDMENT.” The gentleman of the previous case “unfolded” because he got tip with the most complete spontaneity — there was not any mental analysis, fears nor prejudices He got up to open the door, that was all!
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
These are the seven clues to travel in the astral body.
Zodiacal Course, 1951
A practice
When the theurgist “leaves” the physical body, he travels to the sidereal temples in the following manner: The astral body begins to walk in the form of concentric circles, with the intention of reaching the heart-temple of a specific star. The panorama of things change in a few instants, the theurgist is in the presence of the sidereal temple and the guardians of the columns “J” and “B”. The theurgist will make the strictly required salutes as we have taught in the previous pages, take the seven steps inside the heart-temple of the star and will then kneel at the feet of the Sidereal Genie. If the Genie says: “granted”, the disciple asks for “choir”; the Genie will make a sign and the army of the verb will begin to sing in sacred language to carry out the “work that we have asked for”. The army of the verb creates with the word. In these sublime moments we go into ecstasy. Entire Nature kneels before the Sidereal Gods and their ineffable canto elevates us to the plethora of light.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
Every morning at sunrise, with your face towards the East, perform vocalization practices with all of the syllables that we have taught in this book, start with the first syllable until you finish (during many successive mornings) with the last three syllables of this chapter. If you faithfully practice each one of the exercises that we have taught in order, for at least six consecutive days, you will soon project yourself within your astral body, this is if you are a respectable person, that you neither abuse of liquors nor tobacco, that you do not propagate gossip, that you do not enjoy making fun of your neighbors, that you love and respect every living being.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practiceNight 16
Our disciples must acquire the power to project the Astral Body. That power is acquired by vocalising for an hour, daily, the sacred mantram: “EGIPTO”.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
The vowel “E” makes the thyroid gland vibrate and confers upon man the power of occult hearing. The “G” awakens the chakra of the liver, and when this chakra has reached its full development, a man may then enter and leave the body whenever he wishes.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practiceNight 16
The vowel “I”, combined with the letter “P”, develops clairvoyance in man, and the power which enables man to project the Astral Body through the Window of Brahma, which is the pineal gland. The letter “T” strikes upon the vowel “O”, which is intimately related with the chakra of the heart, and thus man is able to acquire the power to detach himself from this plexus and leave in the Astral Body. The correct pronunciation of the mantram is: EEEEGGGGIIIIIIPTOOOO. They who have not yet been able to project the Astral Body with the keys we have given, are unable to do so because they do not have that power. So, they must firstly acquire it by vocalising for an hour daily the mantram “EGIPTO”. This mantram develops totally the chakras related with the projection of the Astral Body, and the disciple thus acquires the power of astral projection. The disciple will be able to enter and leave the physical body at will.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A practice
The Apprentice must invoke the Master Pãrvati to help him to control the sexual organs during the practice of Sexual Magic. The Journeyman must invoke Lakhsmi to teach him how to project the astral body. It is urgent to learn how to travel consciously and positively in the astral body. The Master must invoke Sarasvati so that he may help him to Christified the mind. These invocations are made during Sexual Magic.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
In the following paragraphs we will teach the mantra for astral projection as taught by a sage in one of his books. These mantras are in the Sanskrit language and the yogis of India use them to leave in the astral body.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practiceNight 17
MANTRAM FOR ASTRAL PROJECTION “Hare Ram. Hare Ram, Ram Hare Hare. Hare Cristo. Hare Cristo, Cristo, Cristo, Hare, Hare. Hare Murare Modup Coiptus Hare Copal Govind Mukum Sonre. Mage Prage Yodi Kolpi Basi Parvot Tullo Hiro No Dane En Bai de Nem Sri Govind, Sri Govind. Sri Govind. Sri Govind. Ganesha Namap.”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practiceNight 17
The devotee should fall asleep with the head towards the north or towards the east. It is necessary that the devotee should first learn by heart these mantras of India. The devotee should lie down dorsal decubitus (face up), should beg, call and invoke with all his Soul the Master Laksmi to take him out consciously arid positively in the astral body. It is necessary to call Laksmi in the name of the Christ. INVOCATION “In the name of the Christ, by the glory of the Christ, by the power of the Christ, I call you, Lakhsmi Lakhsmi Lakhsmi Amen.”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practiceNight 17
This invocation is repeated thousands of times supplicating to the Master Lakhsmi to take you consciously out of the physical body and to teach you how to travel consciously in the astral body. After making this invocation, recite the Sanskrit mantra thousands of times with the mind concentrated on the Christ. Fall asleep calmly while making the invocation. When you wake up, practice a retrospective exercise to remember where you were, where you walked, with whom you were speaking etc.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
It is necessary to ask Lakhsmi to teach you how to go consciously into the astral. It is necessary to have patience as great as that of Saint Job to learn how to go out consciously in the astral body. Let us remember that the degree of Apprentice is of seven years and that only after seven years do the first flashes of illumination begin. We give this caution so that the student knows what to expect. For the curious, the profane and the profaners of the Temple; it is best that they leave. This science is not for the curious.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
Jesus, the Great Hierophant said, “Help yourself and I will help you.” So then, the Gnostic student should take account of these words of the Master. The mantra to go out in the astral body as we have taught in this chapter are marvelous. The invocation to the Master Lakhsmi is magnificent, marvelous, but the Gnostic student must help him self, must concentrate on the navel. He must fall asleep singing the mantra mentally, and when he finds himself dozing, when he feels that lassitude characteristic of sleep he should imagine himself to be a breeze, a gas, something subtle, to feel himself to be completely aerial and gaseous, and in that state, feeling thus, aerial and subtle, to forget the heaviness of the physical body, to think that he can fly anywhere because he no longer has weight of any kind. Forgetting his physical body, feeling like a cloud, aroma, breeze, divine breath, he should leap up from his bed. Do not try to leap mentally; it is urgent that all this is translated into action, into concrete acts. Once outside the physical body, leave your house and direct yourself in the astral body to the Gnostic Church, or to whichever place you want. With the astral body one can travel to other planets. With the astral body one can visit the most distant places of the cosmos, the Mystery Temples etc.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
IVThere are elementals that help us with astral travel
The Angel's Trumpet with its syllable KAM, the Jayo plant with BOYA, and the mantras of the birds that Eliphas Levi gave him as a key.
A practiceNight 18
There are elementals that help us with astral travel. Let us remember the elemental of that tree known in different countries as Borrachero, Angels Trumpet, Flower of the Night. This elemental can take the human being out in the astral body. It is enough for the Gnostic student to always have one of these trees in his home. It is necessary to gain the affection of the elemental of the tree. During the night the Gnostic student concentrates on the elemental of the tree. He will vocalise the syllable KAM many times and then fall asleep begging the elemental of the tree to take him from the physical body into the astral body, to whatever remote part of the world, of the infinite cosmos. The vegetable elemental will help all those who in truth know how to ask with faith and Love. This tree is known as Floripondio in Peru; Higanton in Bolivar, Colombia. Many people triumph with these practices immediately because they are hypersensitive but, on the other hand there are people who are not hypersensitive. These people need to practise a great deal to attain victory.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Elemental Magic
Paracelsus says that we need to harness the elementals of nature to the chariot of science in order to fly through the air, to ride the Eagle, to walk on water, to travel to the most distant places on earth in a few moments.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Elemental Magic
Every Angel’s Trumpet tree has its corresponding elemental, who has to be utilized by those who wish to consciously depart in their astral body. I was frequently utilizing the elemental of this tree in order to teach my disciples to consciously depart in their astral bodies. I say that I was utilizing it because I am referring to ancient times.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Elemental Magic
A practice
Then, the disciple, while laying on his bed, was going to sleep and I was commanding the elemental to take that disciple out from his physical body. These commands were accompanied with the mantra of this tree, which is “KAM” and must be pronounced by prolonging the sound of the two last letters, like this: KAAAAAAAMMMMMMMMMM All of our Gnostic disciples of this day and age must employ the powers of this elemental in order to learn how to consciously depart in astral body. For this purpose, just proceed as we have just taught. You must imperiously command the elemental like this: “When I call you, you will always assist me. I need you to take me out in my astral body every time that I command you to do so.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Elemental Magic
A practice
Afterwards, the disciple will pierce a finger of his hand with a needle and with a knife he will make an incision on the tree in which he has to deposit his blood. In this way, the pact with the genie of this Angel’s Trumpet tree will be formalized.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
“Write with blood, thus, you will learn that the blood is spirit.” (Nietzsche).
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
“Blood. Blood is a very special fluid.” (Goethe). Then, the disciple will cut some hair from his head and will hang it on the tree. He will collect some petals from the flowers of the tree and will place them within a little bag hung from his neck as a talisman. Hence, from that instant, the disciple has this humble elemental under his service, who will always assist to his call.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Elemental Magic
A practiceNight 18
When the disciple wants to consciously depart in his astral body, he goes to sleep on his bed and pronounces the mantra of this tree. His mind is concentrated on this elemental genie, calling him mentally and begging him to take him out in his astral body. In the state of transition between vigil and dream, the elemental of the Angel’s Trumpet tree will take him out of his physical body and will take him consciously to the places longed for.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Elemental Magic
A practice
Anytime the disciple can visit this tree he must do it in order to water it, bless it and to cut its flowers, which he will utilize whenever he wishes to do so. As we have already stated, these flowers must be crushed with a stone, then their juice is extracted and applied over the brain in order to depart in astral body. It is beneficial to warn that the application of this juice is performed at the time when the disciple will lay down on his bed, when he is going to sleep. However, when the flowers are not available, the disciple must invoke his serving elemental in order for the elemental to take him out in his astral body.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Elemental Magic
A practice
This marvelous plant serves in order to help one depart in astral body. The mantra of the ‘Jayo’ is: “BOYA-BOYA-BOYA.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
"I have come to ask you a great favour," I said, "I would like you to give me a key so that I may instantly go out in astral body any time I need to."
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
One night, out of the dense form, I went everywhere calling for the soul of that late departed one who in life was called Abbot Alfonso Luis Constants (Eliphas Levi). I found him sitting at an old desk in the august hall of an old palace.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
With much courtesy he rose from his armchair to respectfully greet me.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
"With pleasure," the abbot replied, "but before, I would like you to bring me the following homework by tomorrow: What is the most monstrous thing that exists on earth?"
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
"Please give me the key right now..."
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
"No! Bring me the homework and I will give you the key with pleasure."
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
If I sought a special key, It was not for my insignificant worthless person, but for many other people who yearned for conscious and positive astral projection.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Then I exclaimed: Love is the most magnificent thing that exists on earth! Eureka! Eureka! Eureka! Now I have discovered the secret. Hatred is the antithesis of the most magnificent thing.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Hatred
An account
The solution to the complex problem proved to be obvious. Undoubtedly I had to make contact with Eliphas Levi again. Projecting the Eidolon once more was routine for me, so clearly I was born with that precious faculty.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Travelling with the EIDOLON, or magic double, very far away from my physical body, I moved through different European countries searching for the abbot, but he was nowhere to be found.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
All of a sudden I unwontedly sensed a telepathic summons and I entered a luxurious mansion; and there was the abbot, but...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Oh! What a surprise! What a wonder! What is this? Eliphas had become an infant and was lying in his cot. A truly unique case, was it not?
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
With profound veneration I approached the baby and said very softly: "Master I bring the homework; the most monstrous thing which exists on earth is hate. Now I want you to fulfil your promise. Give me the key..."
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
It is manifestly clear that when the Consciousness awakens, voluntary astral projection is no longer a problem.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
A practice
These mantras are found to be closely related to the elemental class of birds and it is evident that they will effectively assist the devotee by helping in the work of astral projection. Each bird is the physical body of an elemental and they always assist the neophyte provided that there is proper conduct. If the aspirant is eager for assistance from the elemental class of birds, they must learn to love them. Those who commit the crime of confining creatures of Heaven in abominable cages, will never receive this help. Feed the birds of Heaven, transform yourself into a liberator of these creatures, open the doors of their prisons and you will be helped by them.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
The devotee should repeatedly sing the magic sounds in profound meditation whilst going to sleep.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
When, for the first time I experimented with the majestic key, after intoning the mantras, I felt light and airy, as if something had entered inside the EIDOLON.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
It is obvious that I did not wait to be lifted from the bed; I myself abandoned the couch. I voluntarily arose, and walked very slowly out of the house. The innocent elementals of friendly birds within my astral body helped in my astral projection.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Elemental Magic
The complete and absolute development of these two parts of the great key, will permit us to project ourselves into the astral at will in a conscious and positive way. Whoever truly yearns to become an experimentalist in the grand realities of the superior worlds, must develop within themselves the two aspects of the great key.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
In the present chapter, then we have revealed the two fundamental aspects of the majestic key.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
IWhat is done in the vigil state is repeated during dreaming
The question Where am I? and the little jump, practised during the day so they repeat in sleep, followed by accounts of the jump working, his own and Juan's.
A practiceNight 21
This key is that of discernment. During the day we must ask ourselves this question, “Am I in my body or outside of my body?” Then jump up, take a little leap with the intention of floating in space, and if you float it is because you are outside of your body. Then, suspended in space, go where your heart leads you. You must ask yourself this question in the presence of anything that is odd. Suppose that you are walking down the street and you encounter a friend that you haven’t seen for some time, ask yourself this question at that time, “Am I in my body or outside of it?”
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Take a little jump with the intention of floating, and if you float it is because your body is asleep in your bed, and you are outside of it. Go then to where your heart carries you, to that person who is absent from you, to your distant child, to your beloved one.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Awakening
A practice
You should ask yourself this question during the day, in the presence of anything that is curious, such as a disturbance, a rare object, encountering a dead person, meeting a distant friend, etc. In short, ask yourself this question in the presence of anything out of the ordinary. One should practice this key of discernment during the day, at every turn, in every moment, in order to ingrain it well into our soul, and the key will activate during sleep.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Everything that one does during the day one also does during sleep, and if during the day one accustoms oneself to this practice, during the night you will find yourself doing it in the hours of sleep when the soul is outside of the body. And then, upon asking yourself the question, take a little jump such as the one you did during the day, and your consciousness will awaken. You will float in space and visit distant people, and absent child, a mother who hasn’t had any news, etc. During the hours of sleep the soul is outside of the body. The important thing is that the soul realizes that it is functioning outside of the body, so that it can visit any distant place. This is the key of discernment: If, being outside of the body, we invoke with a pure heart the Virgin of Carmel, then, the Divine Mother of the Nazarene will attend our call and we can converse with her. And if, being outside of the body, we invoke the Angel Gabriel, asking him for the Annunciation, then he can tell the husband and wife on which day and at what hour they can make love. And in this way women can conceive their children through the work and grace of the Holy Spirit, that is to say , by command of the Holy Spirit.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952 also in Awakening
A practice
If you are really an unconscious individual like this, then you are not of use as an Initiate. Since a disciple of the Masters upon seeing such a strange ting, like an elephant or a crocodile entering into the house, or a dead person, or a mysterious artifact, or simply any curious thing, the first thing they do is ask themselves: Where am I? Am I in the physical world, or in the Astral World?
The Elementary Level Perfect Matrimony, 1950
A practice
Initiation is not a matter of theories, but of realities. “Absolutely practical.” The first thing that is needed is to awaken the Consciousness. It happens that human beings during the normal hours of sleep, when they are not in the physical body, they roam around through the Astral absolutely asleep and they concern themselves with the same things of the day. These sleeping people are not of use as initiates. I know hundreds of theosophists and rosacrucians that do nothing but live asleep and even though they pay dues and read books, and show themselves to be authoritarians before others, at heart, they a re nothing but poor sleeping people. So, the first thing that is needed is to awaken the Consciousness, and in order for that there is a necessity to cultivate discernment. For example, if you, dear reader, in the moments in which you find yourself reading this book, see an elephant or crocodile enter into your house, would that not be strange to you? Are you such an unconscious an individual that it would not even occur to you to investigate this curious nonsense? Would you continue asleep?
The Elementary Level Perfect Matrimony, 1950 also in Awakening, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Naturally, the neophyte should jump with the intention of floating, and it is logical, that if they float it is because they find themselves in the Astral World, and then full of happiness they awaken in this world and direct themselves then, to the “Hall of Children,” or to the Gnostic Church, where the Masters teach them, and help. Many times a beautiful sunset, or an encounter with a dead person, or simply any small insignificant detail is sufficient in order for the Chela to asks themselves this question: Am I in the physical plane or am I in the Astral plane? This exercise is called discernment, and it is necessary to become accustomed to it, practicing it during the vigil so that it is engraved in the subconscious, and acts during sleep. And is this way the moment arrives in which the human being acquires continuous Consciousness, and then he is now an Initiate of the White Lodge. Do you believe that “Maord Maorc” of the third degree is going to be of much use to you? Are these these black magicians of the third degree believing that their little password “arco” is a great thing?
The Elementary Level Perfect Matrimony, 1950 also in Awakening, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
The first test that the disciple has to endure is the test of the Guardian of the Threshold. Certainly this test is really horrible, the one who is not prepared feels an indescribable terror before the larva of the threshold. The Guardian of the Threshold is the very root of our animal “I,” whose Mantric name is Satan. It is, we could better say, the internal depths of our “Satan.” It is the personification of our past, with all its horrible defects.
The Elementary Level Perfect Matrimony, 1950 also in Fear
A practiceNight 21
5th Keeping in mind that the soul wanders in all the familiar places or locations during ordinary sleep and that in a state of drowsiness it is occupied in the same trades and toils of the day, you should become accustomed to asking yourselves during the entire day: Where am I? Am I within the body or out of it? Then you will take a little hop with the intention of floating. It is logical that if you float, it is because you are out of the body, and if you do not float, it is because you are still in flesh and bones and continue your path. But, if you manage to float, ask your Inner-Self to take you to the Holy Gnostic Church.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening, Zodiacal Course
A practice
One should ask this question in the presence of something which attracts his or her attention, such as a crowd of people, a funeral procession, a strange object, etc. Many have awakened their consciousness with this formidable clue, because on asking this question, they floated in the air and realized that they were out of the body and that the body had been left asleep in bed. “It is because the soul wanders when the body sleeps.” But the soul can come out of its unconscious drowsiness with this clue. During the day, you should become accustomed to this exercise so that it be recorded in the subconscious and act, during sleep. 6th Before falling asleep in your bed, you will do the following exercise of auto suggestion: “I am going to sleep. Wherever I appear now is because I am in the astral body. I will recognize myself, I will recognize myself I will recognize myself and will direct myself to the Gnostic Church.” You can do this auto-suggestion for half an hour and then peacefully fall asleep.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening, Zodiacal Course
Our Gnostic disciples will now understand why the dead do not accept that they are dead. Our Gnostic disciples will now understand why the souls of the living buy and sell, work, etc., during sleep. By coming out in the astral body we get to know the mysteries of life and death. Every human being comes out in the astral body during sleep. By awakening consciousness during normal sleep, we can know the great mysteries of life and death. In order to awaken consciousness during sleep, there is a clue. The clue to awaken consciousness is that of Discernment.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practiceNight 22
Let’s see: If you are going down a street and you meet a friend, or you see objects that attract your attention, take a small jump with the intention of floating; it is logical that if you float it is because you are outside the physical body. However, if you do not float, it is because you are in the physical body.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
It happens that in the internal worlds we act during sleep in the same manner as in flesh and blood, and if to that we add that there we see everything in the same manner as here in the physical world, we will then comprehend that it is only if we succeed at flying that we will awaken consciousness for us to realize that we are in the astral body.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Awakening
A practiceNight 22
This exercise is practiced at every instant during the vigil state before the presence of anything unusual. What is done in the vigil state is repeated during dreaming. If we do this exercise during sleep, the result will be that we will remain floating in the astral body when we jump. Our consciousness will then awaken and full of happiness we shall say, “I am in the astral body.”
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Awakening
In this manner we will be able to head towards the Gnostic Church to personally converse with the Angels, Archangels, Seraphim, Prophets, Masters, etc. In this manner, we will be able to receive instruction from the great Masters of the White Lodge. In this manner, we will be able to travel in the astral body throughout the infinite. We do not need to destroy the mind with so many books and theories. In the internal worlds we can receive the teaching of the Masters. Upon awakening from natural sleep, disciples should make the effort to remember everything that they saw and heard during sleep.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
“Sleep and Memory” are the powers, which permit us to know the great mysteries of life and death.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
During the hours of sleep, every human travels in the Astral, floats out of the Physical Body. Unfortunately, human beings wander during sleep, in the Internal Worlds with their conscience absolutely asleep also. Usually, they dedicate themselves to the same tasks of daily life. If someone was to awaken consciousness when dedicated to nocturnal tasks, he or she will have the opportunity of contemplating with their astral eyes all the marvels of the Superior Worlds, and will be able to dedicate himself or herself to the study of the Great Mysteries of Life and Death.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
A practice
EXERCISE: During the vigil state, in each instant during the hustle and bustle of daily life, we need to get accustomed to the exercise of “discernment.” When a student sees, for example a beautiful sunset with all its purple colors, the most logical thing that should be done is to ask oneself: Am I in the Astral Body? Am I travelling out of the Physical Body?
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Next, try taking a small jump, a hop upwards, with the intention of floating. If he manages to float it is because he is in the Astral Body. It is because he left his Physical Body sleeping in bed, inactive, although with all its vital faculties. Gnostic disciples should admit and remember that during sleep the souls astrally see things exactly the same as those existing in the physical world; because of that, anyone firmly believes he is in the Physical Body. It is just that the Law of Levitation reigns in the Internal Worlds while in the Physical World the Law of Gravity reigns!
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
A practice
Therefore, the small jump solves the problem and if one floats in the Astral, consciousness awakens. Every detail, everything worthy of curiosity, every beautiful view of Nature, should be a reason for the student to ask that question and to execute the hop.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
A practice
To achieve the former statement we recommend that every time you come across other people, events or unusual things that call your attention, discern and ask yourself: Am I within my physical body or within my astral body? Then perform a little jump in order to see if you can float; if you can float, it is because you are in the astral body; if you do not float, it is because you are in the physical body. Within the internal worlds we act as if we are in the body of bones and flesh, as if we were physically awakened. There is no difference between these two worlds, between the physical and the astral. (Read The Thousand and One Phantoms by Alexandre Dumas).
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973 also in Awakening, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
What we usually perform during the vigil state we also perform during the slumber state. Therefore, if during the day you practice the former key, that is, to perform a little jump in order to be sure in which of your bodies you are wandering in, then during the night when you leave your bed within your astral body you will also jump but you will remain floating within space while your physical body remains asleep in your bed. Thus you will attend beautiful rituals and classes where the Great Masters teach within the Gnostic temples that exist within the Jinn state in various parts of this country and the world. Unarguably, the secret teachings of the Nahuas are common to all people from the most remote antiquity. Amongst the Hungarian legends there is mention of “monolithic people” whose indescribable characters are similar to those that exist on a gigantic bolder lost in a remote valley of Yucatan, Mexico.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973 also in Awakening
A practice
The human being who is fascinated does not remember himself. We must self-remember from moment to moment. We need to Self-Remember in the presence of every representation that could fascinate us. Let us pause before every representation and ask ourselves: Where am I? Am I in the physical plane? Am I in the astral plane? Then give a little jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere. It is logical that if you float it is because you are outside the physical body. The result will be the awakening of consciousness. The object of asking this question in each moment is so that it becomes engraved in the subconscious, so that it may manifest later during the hours given to sleep, hours when the ego is really outside the physical body. You should know that in astral, things appear just as here in the physical plane. During sleep, and after death, people see everything there in a form so similar to the physical world, that because of this they do not even suspect that they are outside the physical body. No dead person ever believes himself to have died; he is fascinated and profoundly asleep. If, during life, the dead had made a practice of remembering them selves from moment to moment, if they had struggled against the fascination of the things of the world, the result would have been the awakening of consciousness. They would not dream. They would walk in the internal worlds with awakened consciousness. Whoever awakens consciousness can study during the hours of sleep all the marvels of the superior worlds. Whoever awakens the conscious ness lives in the superior worlds as a totally awakened citizen of the Cosmos. Then he lives with the Great Hierophants of the White Lodge.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Awakening, Identification, The Perfect Matrimony
Whoever awakens consciousness can no longer dream; here in this physical plane, or in the internal worlds. Whoever awakens consciousness stops dreaming. Whoever awakens consciousness be comes a competent investigator of the superior worlds. Whoever awakens consciousness is illuminated. Whoever awakens conscious ness can study at the feet of the Master. Whoever awakens conscious ness can talk familiarly with the Gods who initiated the dawn of creation. Whoever awakens consciousness can remember his innumerable reincarnations. Whoever awakens consciousness can consciously attend his own cosmic initiations. Whoever awakens consciousness can study in the temples of the Great White Lodge. Who ever awakens consciousness can know in the superior worlds how his Kundalini is developing. Every Perfect Matrimony must awaken the consciousness to receive guidance and direction from the White Lodge. In the superior worlds the Masters will wisely guide all those who really love one another. In the superior worlds the Masters give to each one that which he needs for his internal development.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Awakening
A practice
Then, perform a small jump and if you float it is because you are within your Astral body. Thus, you can fly and direct yourself to any place in the world. If you do not float, it is because you are within your body of flesh and bones.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
When one practices this exercise during the day, then it is repeated during one’s dreams and the result is that the consciousness awakens and experiences a lucid dream. One becomes aware that one is out from the physical body in the Astral world.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Awakening
A practice
You have seen perfectly that, many times, one dreams about events that have happened during the day. It can also happen that one is very worried and one dreams about the same worries at night. Well, using precisely this aspect of the mind, it is advisable to practice this exercise intensively. Once one gets used to it, once one gets accustomed to it, it is afterward automatically repeated during the hours of sleep and then the result is the awakening of the Consciousness. Because if one practices this exercise when one is outside the body, obviously, the result is the awakening of the Consciousness, because upon making the small jump, one floats and awakens. But one has to really get used to this exercise in the wakefulness state so it is repeated automatically during sleep.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970 also in Awakening
It is worthwhile to know that, during the hours of sleep, the soul is always outside the physical body. During the hours of sleep, the psyche, to be clearer, the psychic material, although it is bottled up within the Ego, is outside the physical body, –the Ego being outside the physical body–.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
It is clear that one lives in those regions as one lives here, in the physical world; and if in those instants he does the experiment, well then the result is the awakening of the Consciousness. Once one awakens, one goes to any place on Earth. One can go to the Temples of Mysteries, one can invoke ineffable beings, talk with them face to face, receive direct instructions from the Great Masters, etc. What were you going to tell me, brother?
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970 also in Awakening
Master: Well, during the hours of sleep, the Ego cannot be inside the body, because if the Ego remained inside the physical body during the hours of sleep, then the vital body or Linga Sharira could not repair the physical body. Normally, the Linga Sharira, the vital body, during the hours when the Ego is absent, repairs the dense body. In those hours, the thyroid gland secretes a lot of biological iodine which disinfects the body. The solar plexus also works intensively; the hepatic plexus, wonderfully. Then, the hepatic plexus captures, in such instants of sleep, solar energy; it passes it to the solar plexus and the solar plexus then distributes it through all the canals of the great sympathetic nervous system and the repair of the physical body is achieved. Thus, when the Ego returns again to the physical body, this body is already completely repaired and ready for the new activities of the day. Therefore, what is lived in dreams, is lived outside the physical body.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
A practice
Upon observing a place, we should never forget the matter of the seven dimensions of nature; it is convenient, therefore, to ask ourselves: “In what dimension am I? Then, it is necessary, in the way of verification, to take the highest possible jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere. It is logical that if we float it is because we are outside of the physical body. We should never forget that when the physical body sleeps, the Ego with the Lunar Bodies and the Essence within, unconsciously ambulates like a somnambulist in the Molecular World. The Division of Attention into Subject, Object and Place, leads to the awakening of Consciousness.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening
A practice
Within this Place factor, we should include the dimensional issue, since it could be the case that we are really in the fourth or in the fifth dimension of nature during the moment of observation; let us remember that nature has seven dimensions.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
The law of gravity reigns in the three-dimensional world. The Law of Levitation exists within the superior dimensions of nature.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
It is logical to say that an exercise that is practiced from moment to moment daily, that becomes a habit, a custom, is recorded so much in the different zones of the mind that afterwards, it is automatically repeated during dreaming, when we are really outside of the physical body and the result is the awakening of Consciousness.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening
An account
After becoming accustomed to this exercise, to this Division of Attention into three parts, to these questions, to this little jump, etc., many Gnostic students ended up practicing the same exercise during the sleep of the physical body, when they were really in the superior worlds and when they made the famous experimental jump, they floated delightfully in the surrounding atmosphere; they then awoke Consciousness, they then remembered that the physical body had remained asleep in the bed and full of joy they were able to dedicate themselves to the study of the mysteries of life and death in the superior dimensions.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening
As a direct consequence of this that we are affirming we can emphasize the fact that the exercise of the division of attention in three parts is also repeated, as in the case of dreams, in those hours when the essence imprisoned within the ego is found outside of the physical body.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
A practice
In the presence of any interesting image or representation one must self-remember and ask oneself the following questions: “Where am I?” “What am I doing here?” “Am I outside of my physical body?”
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah also in Identification
A practice
Next, carefully observe all your surroundings. Look well at the sky with inquisitive eyes, and at the details of the inner worlds; at times a dramatic interplay of strange colors, at times some strange animal, the ghost of a deceased loved one, etc. These things will confirm to you that you are outside of the physical body, at that time the consciousness will awaken. In those moments of reflection and self-remembering, it is also very useful to take a small jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere. It is logical that if we float it is because we are outside of the physical body. If during the dream state the sleeping person asks himself similar reflective questions, it is logical that he will awaken consciousness. If after death the “Ego” asks itself similar questions in the presence of any image or representation, it would awaken instantly. Unfortunately, it does not occur to the “Ego” to ask such questions, because never in life did it become accustomed to do so. It is necessary to take up this habit and live it intensely. It is only in this way that asking ourselves such questions—while dreaming and after death—can occur to us. The result of such a practice is the awakening of consciousness. All those who awaken consciousness become clairvoyant. All those who awaken consciousness live, during the sleep of the physical body, completely awake in the superior worlds. The Great Masters do not dream.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah also in Awakening, Identification
A practiceNight 23
Master: Upon asking the question to oneself, instead of giving explanations to oneself, one must open himself to what is new and then do the experiment. If one cannot make the small jump inside the place where one is listening to the conference, then ask for permission and do what I did: go out and make the jump outside, maybe on a street, maybe in a courtyard, to clearly see whether he is in astral or not.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
A practiceNight 23
But it happens that, many times, the individual, even when he asks himself that question and even when he makes the jump, he does not float, because his mind puts weight unconsciously to that which has no weight. That is, subconsciously or infra-consciously, he is believing that he is in the physical, and then, upon making the jump, he adds the weight –which does not exist– with his mind, and then he has weight – even if he does not have weight, he has weight–. So the individual deceives himself by saying: “I’m in the physical world,” and he fails in the experiment.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
A practiceNight 23
No! One must get out from doubt. If upon making the jump, he does not float, then he must climb onto something and throw himself into space. But be careful! Do not climb onto a very high tower and throw yourselves from there and kill yourselves; or from a bridge, or down a staircase, and you become crippled or die, no! What I mean to say is that you climb on a chair, on a sofa, on one of those things, that is, an object that, upon jumping, you are not going to break a foot, right? And you will then see that if you are in astral, you will float. Let us see... Tell me, brother. Disciple: Master, in some explanations a missionary has given us, for example he has told us that when one asks oneself, with respect to the subject, “who am I?” to keep an eye on oneself, one answers one-self: “I am so and so”. It doesn’t seem to me that this has to be like that, but rather “who am I?” would be to observe myself. I would like you to explain that to us.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
A practice
Master: Well, at that moment, what one has to do is to not forget oneself, that is all, just like that. There is no need to ask oneself who am I or anything like that. At that instant –I repeat– what one has to do is to never forget oneself. Object: to contemplate every object to see what strange and weird thing you can see. Place: why am I here? It is a question one has to ask oneself. If I live somewhere else, what am I doing here? Disciple: Is this constantly, Master? Master: That must be done from instant to instant, from moment to moment. At the beginning, a serious discipline is needed for one’s attention to be divided in three parts. Afterward there is no need to do the discipline, afterward this becomes completely instinctive and works in you almost automatically. For example, I never do this thing to myself with forced or rigorous discipline; in me it is already instinctive. I am here talking, at this moment, before you, and I am already alert, vigilant. I already know where I am and all that, and if we were in astral, I would already know by now that we are in astral without the need to behave in accordance with this rigorous discipline. I made it instinctive, it became a function of my instinctive center. But for it to become a function of the instinctive center, it is necessary first that the instinctive center goes through the sieve of a rigorous discipline. At the beginning it is hard while it becomes instinctive; after it becomes instinctive, it works automatically. Let us see... Disciple: Master, even when we go to sleep, one has to try to enter sleep in those conditions?
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970 also in Awakening, Identification
A practiceNight 24
Master: Upon going to sleep, it is advisable naturally that one observes his room rigorously and says to himself: “Well, this is my room”; that he looks at his ceiling, if the ceiling is painted with such and such color “the walls of my room are painted with such and such color.” To observe them rigorously, to observe all the objects in the room and then to say to himself: “If I were to appear, after this instant in which I am observing, somewhere else, whether on the street or talking with friends or at work, that is, in that place or in those places where I am all the time, or in any other place where I’m not used to being, it is a sign that I will be in the astral body and then I will remember and I will remember and I will remember, and I will make the small jump with the intention of floating. I will do this, I will do this, I will do this!”. Well, practice this exercise for about half an hour or one hour before falling asleep. If this is combined with the practice of the division of attention in the three parts –subject, object, place– I am absolutely sure that you will achieve the awakening of the Consciousness very quickly.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970 also in Awakening
An account
One night Juan visited some friends. They welcomed him with great affection. Seated among them, he took part in the conversation and was really glad. However, since Juan was accustomed, before any important detail, to asking himself that question, logically, this meeting of friends was a reason enough to ask himself: “Am I in the Astral? Am I out of the Physical Body?”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
That Juan mentioned here many times, our friend, used to do this exercise during his daily life, at every moment, before any detail of interest or curiosity.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
He looked around him, and evidently everything showed that he was in the Physical Body. His friends were dressed some with sweaters, others wore suits commonly worn by the urban life man. Nothing indicated that he was in the Astral. Nevertheless, he said to himself: “I will perform the little hop!”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
He excused himself from his friends, and left the room. Once outside, he jumped as high as he could, with the resolute intention of flying. The result was surprising he remained floating in space! He fully realized that he was in the Astral! He realized that he was in the Astral! He realized that his Physical Body had stayed asleep in bed!
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
It had occurred to Juan at that instant to ask himself that question, because he formulated that question to himself at every moment during his daily life. The result: That practice had recorded itself in his Sub-conscious totally; and now, his Subconscious automatically impelled him to repeat it in his dream, precisely when he was out of the Physical Body. It resulted in Astral consciousness. Juan returned to the room and spoke to his friends as follows: “My friends, I communicate to you that we, the ones meeting here now, are in the Astral Body. The thing is that you, friends, went to bed a few hours ago, to sleep. Your Physical Bodies are in their respective beds! Here, all of you are in the Astral.” Everyone looked and touched each other and said: “That is impossible! We are in the Physical Body, in flesh and bones!”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
They ended up laughing at Juan. They laughed like crazy. Juan, seeing that his friends were innocent, or that they lived with an asleep conscience, abandoned the room and, floating in the Astral Body, thought of heading for San Francisco, California, and so he did. He needed to visit a certain Temple, which an initiate founded there.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
Once outside in the garden, I jumped with the intention of floating in the surrounding environment; great was my astonishment when I verified for myself that I was really outside of my physical body. Then I understood that I was in the astral world.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
I then looked around me and asked myself the following questions: Why am I here? Why have I come here? What am I doing here?
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Addressing the lady, I then talked to her in the following manner: “Madam, excuse me a minute while I go out to the garden and I will soon return”. The lady assented with a nod and I abandoned that office for a moment.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
In such moments I remembered that it had been quite some time ago, several hours, that I had abandoned my physical body and the former, unquestionably, was now to be found resting in bed.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Once the unique proof was made I returned to the office where the lady awaited me. Then, I wanted to convince her that I was outside of the physical body; “Lady”, I said, “you and I are outside of the physical body; I want you to remember that quite a few hours ago you lay down to sleep in your bed and now you find yourself here conversing with me, outside of the physical body; since it is known that when the body sleeps, the conscience, the essence, unfortunately stuck within the ego wanders outside of the physical body”.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Once these words were said, the lady looked at me with somnambulist eyes, but she did not understand; I understood that such a lady had an asleep consciousness.. .Not wanting to insist any more I bade her farewell and abandoned the place.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Then I headed for California, with the purpose of carrying out certain important investigations. On the road I met a disembodied person who, in life had been a loader of heavy bundles in the public markets; the unhappy person, carrying on his back, an enormous bundle, seemed to suffer the unspeakable. ..Coming closer to the dead person. I said: “My friend, what is wrong with you? Why do you carry on your painful shoulders, that bundle which is so heavy?” The wretched person, looking at me with somnambulist eyes, answered “I am working.”
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
“But sir, (7 insisted) you have died a long time ago, that bundle that you carry on your shoulders is nothing but a mental form, abandon it.”
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
That lady talked kindly with me. I decided to ask the lady’s permission to leave for a moment –I pretended to go to the bathroom, to go out over there...–. Of course, she politely gave me permission: “You may step out”. Once outside, I said: “I am going to do an experiment, let me see...” I made a small jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding environment and, certainly, I started floating in the environment. So I said to myself: “I am in the astral body!” I returned again, I entered that office, I sat before the desk. The lady there was waiting for me, and I said: “Madam, I want you to know that in this moment we are in the astral body. Remember very well, madam, that you went to bed a few hours ago and exactly at this time, your body is sleeping, resting in bed.” I was waiting for some intelligent answer from that lady, but what I saw in her were the eyes of a sleepwalker. Obviously, her Consciousness was completely asleep. She didn’t understand a thing about what I was telling her.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
A very interesting life experience comes in these moments to my memory. Many, many years ago I arrived at a house, crossed a beautiful garden, crossed the threshold of a living room, and, finally, I entered an office where there was a writing desk.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
In front of the desk I found a very kind lady, she attended to me. Suddenly, while talking with her, I saw on the desk two glass butterflies, the butterflies were very beautiful. What surprised me the most was that those butterflies had life of their own, they moved their wings –and they were made of glass!–, they moved their small heads –and they were made of glass!– and they breathed like any other butterfly – and they were made of glass and had multiple colors!–. So I said to myself: “How is it possible that these glass butterflies do all this, that they have life of their own? Obviously, phenomena of this kind can only happen in the astral world, but, in the physical world, this is completely impossible.” I looked around and I said to myself: “And what am I doing in this place, in this lawyer’s office?” And observing other objects, I could see to the right, in the right corner of that office, an oil lamp, that is, a seven-branched candelabrum, and on the left side, another seven-branched candelabrum.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
Well, in view of that, of the state of profoundly deep sleep in which that lady was, what did I do? I left, I said goodbye to her. I left that office, took off and floated with my astral body toward California –I needed to go to do some investigation in California–. On the way I found a man who had died some time ago. He was carrying a heavy burden on his back –one could see that he had worked carrying heavy loads in some market–. The poor wretch had disincarnated a long time ago, but he believed he was still alive. I approached him and said: “My friend, what is going on with you? Why do you carry such a heavy load on your back?” The answer was: “I am working, I am working...” “But what are you saying, my friend? What are you saying? Don’t you realize that you have already died and that the burden you carry on your back is nothing more than a mental form created by yourself? Do you not understand?”
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
Once out of the room, in the courtyard of that house, I gave an elongated little jump with the intention of floating and, certainly, I floated in the surrounding environment. After I floated, I convinced myself that I was in the astral body. I returned to the room, occupied my place again, I sat in the chair where I was previously seated, and I addressed all the attendees: “My friends,” I told them, “I have to tell you that those of us present here are in the astral body.”
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
I also remember a very interesting case that happened thirty to forty years ago. Suddenly, I saw myself in a room; a group of people were there, we were talking about esoteric matters, etc. However, as I am not used to forgetting myself, firstly; secondly, I love to observe in detail everything that surrounds me: the objects, things; thirdly, I do not remain in a place in an unconscious way without having observed it first in detail and having asked myself: Why am I in this place, what am I doing here? It is clear that, on that occasion, these three aspects of the division of the Consciousness entered into activity. First I said to myself: “Well, what am I doing here?” I did not forget myself, I looked at the place. “Why am I here?” I looked at the people. “These people, why are they around me? Why am I talking to them?” Everything seemed physical, material; those friends had coats. Anyway, nothing showed that we were in the astral world. The objects, frankly, were normal, but I had not forgotten myself. Upon seeing the place, I said to myself: “Why do I have to be here in this place? And why in this meeting if I don’t have an appointment with anyone? And why am I here in this room?” Looking at that, it was so physical, so material, that it seemed as though my interrogations, my questions were too much, as no detail showed that I was in the astral world. But, instinctively, I have always divided my attention in three parts: subject, object and place. What did I do? I asked for permission too. I pretended to go out over there, and I really went out; I pretended to maybe go to the bathroom, or to maybe go out and get some air, inhale some fresh air and then go back to the place; anyway, so many things, right?
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
A practice
Then they looked at me surprised. Some of them studied esotericism, occultism, etc. in the physical world. They did not understand me; they looked at each other and one of them said to me. “No! We are in the physical world. Are you crazy? Where are you taking this from, that we are in astral?” I told them: “Yes, we are in astral.” But since no one wanted to believe me, I left that room, and after I left that room, I went to a certain place with the purpose of doing esoteric investigations, etc. And then I returned, certainly, to the physical body. But see how I awakened, by means of the division of attention in three parts: subject, object, place. Now our brother R. is going to ask a question here. Disciple: I want to ask you, Master, if at the same time that one asks oneself the question “what am I doing here?”, in a conference, for example, if I should give the answer to myself, give the explanation to myself.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
A lady was waiting for me in the room; I recognized her immediately, she was the same one that I had seen in the astral so many years ago. She told me: “Follow me, sir.” And I followed her; I went inside where the lawyer’s office was. The only difference was that this time I did not find her in front of the desk, but rather her husband. He was a man of mature years now, a lawyer, although without a degree, right? But he was a lawyer, that is to say, an “unqualified lawyer”, to be clearer. [...] He stood up to welcome me. He made me sit at his desk. They introduced me to the patient that I was to heal. We talked about magnetism because, of course, I was going to use magnetism to heal that patient. And of course, around the topic of magnetism, about prana, about psychic healings, we also talked about astral travels, projections, healing at a distance, etc. The conversation was very interesting.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
Years passed, maybe thirty years, or forty, many years passed. Later I had to personally go to Taxco, Guerrero. [...] I had to meet there a certain man whom I was helping, in those days, to be cured from a hemiplegia that he had –one side of his body was paralyzed–. I went there with the intention of helping him, and I helped him –and I even think that the result was good, he was cured–. I made him walk, by the way, with magnetic treatments, and he managed to walk without a cane after having one side of his body paralyzed. I gave him instructions, and I advised him to move quite a lot, as he sat most of the time and that was detrimental to his healing. Well, to make a long story short, I tell you that I crossed the garden of a very beautiful house, then I crossed a room –and, of course, I immediately recognized the place that I had visited so many years ago– and, finally, I entered an office.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
When it was time for dinner, once everyone had sat around a round table in the room, then the lady, in front of him, tells me: “I have known you, sir, for a long time. What I do not remember is the exact place where I met you for the first time, but I know you, and that’s for sure; you are not unknown to me, I have known you for a long time.” Of course, I elbowed the man right away and told him: “Are you convinced, are you convinced now?” And he said to me: “One hundred percent! Totally convinced!” Well, that man had clear proof, and if he had not belonged to a certain sect of a dogmatic type and that his religious preceptors would not have forgiven him, undoubtedly, he would have come to the doctrine, to Gnosis, because the proofs were definitive for him, that is clear.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
IIIOur disciples must not move themselves at the time of awakening
The return: staying still on waking, the retrospective exercise that joins the two rooms of the head, and the order given to the subconscious to remember.
A practiceNight 1
45. Our disciples must not move themselves at the time of awakening, because with this movement, the astral body is agitated and the memories are lost.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
Our disciples, upon awakening from their material sleep, must not move, because with the body's movement the astral body is stirred, and recollections are lost. Upon awakening, disciples must make an effort to remember all those places where they were while their bodies were sleeping. They must make an effort to remember all their past experiences on the astral plane. Our disciples must not recount their experiences to anyone.
The Mysteries of Life and Death
A practice
He advised us never to move in bed at the exact instant of awakening, explaining to us that with such a movement the astral body is agitated, and the recollections are lost. It is unquestionable that during the hours of sleep the human soul travels outside the physical body; it is important not to forget our intimate experiences when returning to the body.
The Three Mountains, 1972 also in Awakening
A practice
Retrospective Exercise Using a fair amount of didactics, the professor taught us a certain marvelous retrospective exercise.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practice
He suggested to us to practice a retrospective exercise at that precise moment with the aim of remembering facts, occurrences and places visited during dreams.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I solemnly declare that such a psychical exercise had astonishing results, because my recollections became more vivid, intense and deep.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practiceNight 1
46. As soon as he awakes on his bed, the first thing that the disciple needs to do is to practice the retrospective exercise in order to remember with precision all of his internal experiences. This is how internal wisdom is attained, when the two rooms of the consciousness and the subconsciousness are united.
Igneous Rose, 1954
32. Our head is a tower with two rooms, the cerebrum and the cerebellum.
Igneous Rose, 1954
33. The cerebellum is the room of the subconsciousness. The cerebrum is the room of the consciousness.
Igneous Rose, 1954
34. The wisdom of the internal worlds belongs to the room of the subconsciousness. The things of our world belong to the room of the consciousness.
Igneous Rose, 1954
35. When the consciousness and the subconsciousness are united, one can then study all the marvels of the internal worlds and pass them to the physical brain.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
36. It is urgent that our disciples join the two rooms of this marve lous tower of our head. 37. The key for this is the retrospective exercise.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practiceNight 2
38. When we awake after our dream, we must practice a retrospective exercise. This is in order to remember all the things that we saw and heard and all the works that we performed when we were out, far from the physical body.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practiceNight 2
39. This is how the two rooms of the consciousness and the subconsciousness are joined in order to give us great illumination.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
In the astral, you will mathematically recognize yourself and at the time of awakening, do not move. Do a retrospective exercise to remember where you have been. 7th Put yourself to sleep pronouncing the mantram: OMNIS BAUM IGNEOS; like this: Ooooommmmmnissssssbaaaaauuuuuuuummmmmmiiiiiignnneeeeeoooooooooooosssssss, syllabicating the mantram, lengthening the sound of each vowel and praying to thy Inner-Self to take thee out of the body. Then softly get out of your bed and floating in space, go to the Gnostic Church.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening, Zodiacal Course
A practice
So while his body is asleep in bed, the disciple in the internal worlds will become an invisible help and a worker under the orders of the Universal White Fraternity. Before, the chakras turned from right to left and now with these exercises, they will turn positively like the hands of the clock. These exercises will totally impede him from dreaming again and while his body sleeps, he will be conscious in the internal worlds. That will be the result of these exercises. The conscience of dreams is a remnant of our animal conscience that we once possessed. Animals live a life of pictorial dreams. There will be many who will have difficulty “leaving” in the astral body at will, but by all means the exercises of this lesson of Gemini, will “inevitably” awaken their conscience and so, while their bodies sleep in their beds, they, too, will work consciously in the internal worlds. The important thing is that on awakening, they remember well their astral experience, which “are no longer dreams” but rather “conscious experiences”. To obtain this it is necessary that on awakening, not to move and do a retrospective exercise to remember well all we did white we were out of the physical body, since while every individual’s body is asleep, he is out of the body; those with asleep conscience, “dreaming” and those with awake conscience, “working” consciously.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening
The disciple who is asleep in the internal worlds, will now awaken his conscience and will not dream anymore. He will exchange his “dreams” for conscious experiences. These exercises will produce those internal shocks which will awaken his conscience, and will exchange dreams for real and effective experiences within the internal worlds.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening
A practice
The Path of High Theurgy allows us to study the Great Mysteries of Life and Death. However, it is necessary to learn how to consciously travel in the astral body. Those who do not as yet have that faculty need to acquire it. A daily, vigorous training is necessary to obtain this faculty. After returning to the body, we awaken in bed. Many students commit the error of moving in their bed at the precise instant of awakening from their normal sleep. With this movement, the astral body becomes agitated and memories are lost. On awakening from his normal sleep, the student of Occultism should not move! He should remain resting, close his eyes and do a retrospective exercise to minutely remember all those places where he was in the astral body, all those words he heard, said, etc. For this kind of investigation, the Mediums of Spiritualism are useless. It so happens that Mediums do not have enough mental equilibrium. Mediums are victims of Tenebrous Entities. The Mental Body is dislocated in Mediums. By this, we mean that the Mental and Astral Bodies of the Medium are dislocated. With these two vehicles in this condition, Mediums do not possess the mental equilibrium, the exact logic that is needed to investigate the causes and effects of Nature. We already know that the Natural Laws are wisely processed. Every effect has its cause. Every cause is the effect of another Superior Cause. Often times, we have listened to many unbalanced individuals who say that they communicate with Entities from Beyond! Usually, those subjects are Mediums. It is necessary to know that the Investigator of the Superior Worlds should possess a fault less mental equilibrium. The true Investigator is profoundly analytical and vigorously exact. We are mathematical in Investigation and very demanding in expression.
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
A practice
This is one way of placing the Subconscious at the service of the conscious will. Upon returning to the Physical Body, after sleep, on returning to the normal vigil state, the student should not move in his bed, since in this movement of the Physical Body, the Astral body is agitated and the memories are lost. In such a moment the student should practice a retrospective exercise to remember where he was, the places where he traveled, and the things he learned while acting in the Astral Body.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Desire and Will
A practice
Juan gave up after one more effort. He continued on his way and arrived at last, at the Temple, which was the objective of his visit. Later, he returned happily to his Physical Body, He introduced himself through the pineal gland, which is the window of Brahma, to the seat of the Soul as Descartes says. Rest assured that with the Clue here revealed, innumerable, are the disciples who have managed to awaken consciousness in the Internal Worlds. The important thing is to practice it constantly, during the vigil state, so that it may be recorded in the Subconscious and acts automatically during sleep.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
A practice
Upon waking from normal sleep, every Gnostic student should do a retrospective exercise on the process of sleep, to remember all those places he visited during the hours of sleep. We already know that the ego travels a great deal, going to where we have been, repeating all that we saw and heard. The Masters instruct their disciples when out of the physical body. It is urgent to know how to meditate profoundly and then practice what we learned during the hours of sleep. It is necessary not to move at the time of awakening because with this movement the astral is agitated and the memories are lost. It is urgent to combine the retrospective exercises with the following mantram; RAOM - GAOM. Each word is divided into two syllables. One should accentuate the vowel O. This mantra is for the student what dynamite is for the miner. Just as the miner opens a way through the bowels of the earth with the aid of dynamite, so also, the student opens a way to the memories of the subconscious with the aid of this mantra.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Awakening, The Perfect Matrimony
While the body sleeps, the ego lives in the internal worlds and travels to different places. In the internal worlds we are tested many times. We receive initiation in the internal temples. It becomes necessary to remember everything that we do outside the body. With the instructions given in this book every human being will be able to awaken consciousness and remember his internal experiences. It is painful to know that there are many Initiates who work in the Great Temples of the White Lodge whilst their physical body sleeps, and yet they do not remember anything because their memory is atrophied. Here you have the exercises to develop the memory. Practice in tensely. Make the subconsciousness work. Awaken the conscious ness, and put the supraconsciousness into activity.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Awakening
A practice
Upon waking up physically in the morning, after your sleep, one must remain still in one’s bed, not move, because with any movement the psyche of the person, of the individual, is agitated, and the memories are lost; to be still in one’s bed, and then practice a retrospective exercise to remember meticulously the places where one walked, the people with whom one spoke, the state in which one was – whether asleep or awake– outside the physical body, etc. The very memories that he will be obtaining, will be indicating to him if he is awakening or if he is not awakening and to what degree he is awakening. One goes on realizing it by oneself, through one’s own effort.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970 also in Awakening
A practice
So, therefore I clarify: this exercise of the division of attention in three parts –subject, object, and place– is practiced in wakefulness from second to second, from instant to instant, from moment to moment until it becomes a habit, until it becomes instinct; afterward, this will work in one instinctively. But at the beginning, and for a long time, it is necessary that this be practiced in a rigorous esoteric discipline. It will happen that this exercise, practiced in wakefulness, will be etched so much in the subconscious that it will then work automatically during the hours of sleep.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
All memory is deposited in the subconscious. Many Initiates work consciously in the superior worlds during normal sleep. Unfortunately, in the physical world they are not aware of this, because they do not have a good memory. We must learn how to handle the subconscious.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
A practice
In the moments of waking up from sleep, we will command the subconscious as follows: “Subconscious, tell me everything that I saw and heard while outside of my physical body.” Next, do a retrospective exercise in order to remember everything you did while outside of the physical body. Compel the subconscious to work. Give it imperative orders obliging it to inform you. Practice this exercise upon awakening, while you are still sleepy and drowsy.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
A practice
A retrospective exercise is needed in those moments when we want to remember our dreams.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
Lying on his right side, with his head pointing north, he moves his legs slowly so that his knees are bent. In this posture, the left leg rests on top of the right one. He then places his right cheek on his right palm, and lets his left arm rest on the left leg.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
When one wakes up, one does not have to move, because any movement shakes up our “values,” and then the memory [of our dreams] is lost.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
When nothing is left in the memory, the retrospective exercise must be based on the first thought we had at the moment we awakened. That thought, obviously, relates to the last dream.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
We must point out that the retrospective exercise should start before completely coming back to the vigil state, when we are still drowsy, to try to follow the dream sequence. The practice of that exercise always starts with the last image that we had moments before coming back to the vigil state.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
10. When one unfolds at will, can he remember where he has been when they wake up. It is clear that if they do not remember, it is because they have not unfolded at will; since to me it seems impossible that a person who unfolds at will, who left the body intentionally, consciously, is not capable of remembering what they saw outside of their body. For example, when you leave your house for the office and then return to your house, do you remember what you saw at your office, the work that you performed, and the orders from your boss?
Beyond Death
Well, madam, this is the same thing. Remember that your physical body is a house of flesh and bone. If you leave this house at will, you will see many things, and also if you return voluntarily, it is obvious that you will also remember everything that you saw and heard.
Beyond Death
A practice
During the hours of ordinary sleep all human beings act and travel in their astral body; however upon awakening, not all of us remember what we saw, heard or did while acting within that body. Therefore, in the mornings, upon awakening from one’s dreams, one must perform the effort to remember all which one had dreamt. One’s dreams are nothing more than experiences within the astral world. One must carefully take note of all of them in a notebook.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
IVThe perfect memory of our dream experiences
Retrospection carried back through the day and past lives, the notebook of dreams, and the Dream Yoga discipline built on them.
A practice
266. However, when the student reaches this point, he should then practice the exercise during the transition between vigil and sleep. 267. Then, in visions during his dreams, he will meticulously remember all the details of his childhood, because when dreaming, we are in contact with the subconsciousness where all our memories are stored.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
264. You can perform the retrospective exercise daily, in order to meticulously remember all the incidents that occurred the previous day, and to inversely remember all the events that occurred eight days before, fifteen days, one month, two months, one year, ten years, twenty years, etc., until precisely remembering all the events of the first years of our childhood. 265. When the student reaches the first three or four years of his childhood during the retrospective exercise, then it is very difficult for him to remember the events of the first years of childhood.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
268. When we take advantage of the state of transition between vigil and sleep, this procedure of internal retrospection can be prolonged until we remember the instances that preceded the death of our past physical body, and the last painful scenes. While continuing the retrospective exercise, we continue to remember our entire past reincarnation and all the past reincarnations that preceded it.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
269. This exercise of profound, internal and delicate retrospection permits us to remember all our past lives.
Igneous Rose, 1954
A practice
103. The disciple should try to remember all transpired events in a reverse order, beginning with the last ones until going back to the first events of his infancy. 104. We can remember all memories of our infancy by practicing the retrospective exercise during those instants of dozing off. 105. In those instants we can exert ourselves to recall the last experiences of our past reincarnation.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
101. The clue to remembering our past lives is in the retrospective exercise. 102. The disciple submerged in profound meditation should carry out a retrospective recapitulation of all the events that have occurred in his lives, from the present to the past.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
106. So, in a retrospective order, we can review our entire past and past reincarnations. 107. The important thing is to practice this retrospective exercise during instants of dozing. 108. Like this, in visions in our sleep, we shall remember all our past lives. 109. The pulmonary chakras permit us to remember our past lives. These chakras are developed with the vowel “A”, like this: 110. AAAAAAAAAAAAAA…………. 111. The mantram “CHAS” is effective to develop the pulmonary chakras.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 4
There is a system for remembering our past reincarnations: this system is the retrospective exercise. The disciple lies in his bed every night, and then practices retrospective exercises. The disciple begins by remembering everything that happened one hour before he went to bed, two hours before, every moment of the afternoon and the morning throughout the day. The disciple makes an effort to remember everything from .
The Mysteries of Life and Death
A practice
If the student falls asleep during the Retrospective Exercise, so much the better, because in the internal worlds, he will be able to know himself, remember his entire life and all of his past lives.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
A practiceNight 4
During the period of Cancer, our Gnostic disciples should practice, before falling asleep in their bed, a Retrospective Exercise of their own life, like someone who is watching a movie from the end to the beginning, or like someone who reads a book from the end to the beginning, from the last to the first page. The objective of this Retrospective Exercise of our own life, is to auto-know, autodiscover ourselves, to recognize our good and evil actions, to study our own Lunar Ego, to make Conscious the Subconscious.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening
A practice
It is necessary to arrive in a retrospective manner at our birth and remember it. A superior effort will permit the student to connect his Birth with the Death of his previous physical body. Drowsiness combined with Meditation, with the Retrospective.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967 also in Awakening
A practice
Lie down on your bed and with all the muscles of your body relaxed, slumber while thinking that the fire of the Holy Spirit continues to descend from heaven (as in the former practice) and enters into your head through the pineal gland. Feel that such a fire inundates your brain and puts into motion from left to right (clockwise) the marvelous and bi-colored lotus flower of your pituitary Chakra, the eye of the Prophet. The pituitary gland is situated in the mid-brow. See it fill with fire and spin upon itself. While in that state of consciousness, vocalize the syllable IN, as follows: IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIINNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Feel as if you are floating on an ocean of fire. This exercise must last for about 30 minutes and must be performed before going to sleep; if possible perform it at the same time everyday, while lying down on your bed.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practiceNight 3
The next day write down everything that you dreamed about in a notebook, without telling your impressions to anybody and without commenting about this esoteric work (that concerns only the secret study of yourself) with anyone.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
A practice
Those candidates who sincerely long for a mystical, direct experience must unquestionably begin with “Dream Yoga” discipline. The Gnostic must be very demanding with himself, and learn to create favorable conditions to remember and understand all those inner experiences that always occur during sleep.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
Before retiring to your bed at the end of your daily routine, it is advisable to pay attention to the state you are in. Devotees whose circumstances make them lead a sedentary life will gain a lot if, before going to bed, they have a short, but very lively walk outdoors. A walk will relax the muscles. I must clarify, however, that we must never abuse physical exercises; we need to live in harmony. Supper, or the final meal of the day, must be light and free of heavy or stimulating foods. Foods that keep us awake or alter our sleep should be avoided.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
The highest way of thinking is not thinking. When the mind is quiet and silent — free of daily routine and mundane anxiety — it is then in a state that is one hundred percent favourable for the Dream Yoga practice. When the Superior Emotional centre is actually working, the thinking process stops, at least for a brief moment. Evidently, the cited centre is activated with Dionysian intoxication. Such rapture is possible when listening with infinite devotion to the delightful symphonies of Wagner, Mozart, Chopin, and others. Beethoven’s music is especially extraordinary because it makes the Superior Emotional centre vibrate intensely.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
Outside the physical body, during the hours of sleep, the soul can talk to her Divine Mother. We must, however, begin with Dream Yoga Discipline. We need to take care of the bedroom where we sleep; it must be pleasantly decorated. The colours best suited for the goal we seek — in spite of what other authors recommend — are precisely the three primary hues: blue, yellow and red.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practiceNight 3
The Gnostic has to take notes — carefully — of the details of the dream or dreams in the notebook or pad, which he placed of the dream or dreams in the notebook or pad, which he placed under his pillow. In this way, he will be able to have a detailed record of his inner progress in “Dream Yoga.” Even if there are only vague fragments of the dream or dreams in our memory, these must be thoroughly recorded.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
We will terminate this chapter with the serious statement that it is not possible to go beyond this stage of the Dream Yoga discipline unless we have obtained the perfect memory of our dream experiences.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
We should review our pad or notebook every month in order to verify the gradual progression of our dream memory. Any possibility of forgetting a dream must be eliminated.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
We cannot continue further with practices unless we have achieved perfect memory. Of particular interest are those dreams which seem to come from past centuries, or that unfold in environments totally unrelated to the vigil existence of the dreamer. One must be in a “watchful perceptive” or “alert anew” state, and pay attention to the study of details which include specific matters, conversations, meetings, temples, or unusual activities which relate to other people.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
On reaching this stage of Dream Yoga discipline, it is indispensable to approach the Tantric aspect of the matter. Ancient wisdom teaches that Tonantzin, (Devi Kundalini) our Divine Cosmic individual Mother (each of us has our own), can take any form, for She is the origin of all forms. Therefore, the Gnostic should meditate upon Her before falling asleep.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
The candidate will start — daily — his dreaming process by repeating, with great faith, the following prayer: “Tonantzin, Teteoinan, O! My Mother, come to me, come to me!” According to Tantric science, if the Gnostic persists with this practice, sooner or later an Initiator Element will come forth from the changing and formless expressions of his dreams. As long as this Initiator has not been totally identified, it is indispensable to continue recording dreams on the pad or notebook. The study and profound analysis of every recorded dream becomes indispensable in Tantric Dream esoteric discipline. This didactic progression will lead us to the discovery of the Initiator or Unifier Element of dreams.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
In other words, the aspirant tries to be conscious of his own dream; that is why he intentionally goes on with it, but carries it to the vigil state, in full lucidity and selfcontrol. Hence, he becomes a spectator and actor of a dream with the advantage — certainly not insignificant — of being able to abandon the scene at will in order to move freely in the Astral World. Then the aspirant, free of the limitations of the flesh, outside the physical body, will have discarded his old familiar environment and penetrated a universe ruled by different laws. The discipline of the dream state of Tantric Buddhists methodically leads us to the awakening of our Consciousness.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974 also in Awakening
A practice
Some people, who are highly psychic, refined or susceptible to impressions, have always possessed in themselves the Initiator Element. These people are characterised by the continuous repetition of the same dream. These psychics re-live periodically various scenes, or see in their dream experiences — constantly a creature or a symbol.... Every time the candidate wakes up from ordinary sleep, and remembers the Initiator Element, (be it a symbol, a sound, a colour, a person, etc.) he keeps his eyes closed, and goes on with the visualisation of that familiar image. He will then try to go back to sleep to continue the same dream.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
When the Gnostic has kept a record of his dreams, he unquestionably discovers a dream that recurs. This, among other reasons, certainly justifies writing all dreams in his notebook or pad. That dream experience — always recurring — is the Initiator Element that, wisely used, leads us to the awakening of the Consciousness.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
Every time the mystic lies on his bed, goes to sleep and meditates at will on the Initiator Element, the result is immediate. Usually, the anchorite relives such dreams consciously, and is able to leave the scene at will, to travel in the supra-sensible worlds. Any dream can be used for such purposes when we actually know the technique. Whoever awakens from a dream can continue with it intentionally, if desiring to do so. In this case, he must go back to sleep and re-live that dream experience with imagination. We must not imagine that we are imagining. Fundamentally, we should re-live the dream in its full and crude reality. Repeating the dream intentionally is the first step towards the awakening of the Consciousness. The voluntary separation from the dream, in plain action, is the second step.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974 also in Awakening, Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
IIn the astral world we find our Guru
What the traveller goes to: the Gnostic Church, the temples and the Masters, the sidereal temples and the planet Venus, and the vehicles shed beyond the astral body.
The awakening of consciousness is urgent. Whoever learns to project the astral body at will, can study at the feet of the Great Masters of Wisdom. In the astral world we find our Guru, who will instruct us in the Great Mysteries.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
Men can converse with angels during sleep. Every woman, every child, every elderly person, can speak to angels during sleep. While outside of the body we can invoke angels, and they will attend our call in order to teach us the word of God.
Book of the Virgin of Carmel, 1952
An account
I, Samael Aun Weor, visited that temple in my astral body. The Masters who dwell there welcomed me with their open arms. They lead me towards the interior of this monastery, which was illuminated by a seven armed candelabra of massive gold, similar to the seven armed candelabra of gold from the temple of Solomon. I then received from them secret teachings.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
Another peasant explored the base of the mountain while following the course of the broad and profound waters of the river. He happened upon enormous boulders of granite, which were bathed by the boisterous waters of the river, and then he found a gigantic temple inlayed within the living rock. This peasant tried to enter into the temple through the central door (since this gigantic temple had three doors), but he found himself surrounded by many serpent skins. Consequently, he flew away terrified. Later on, he returned to this place in order to see the temple, yet he did not find anything. That temple disappeared, as if it had been swallowed by those gigantic rocks.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
In the Hill of Chapultepec, a temple in Jinn state exists; in other words, within the fourth dimension. One can assist this temple in the astral body. The rector of the Temple of Chapultepec is the Venerable Master Rasmussen. This temple is safeguarded by very zealous guardians with naked swords.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
The astral body is part human and part divine; it is endowed with marvelous internal senses with which we can investigate the great mysteries of life and death. The mind, the willpower and the consciousness abide within the astral body.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
The Gnostic Church exists in the higher worlds; the Cathedral of the Soul. In that cathedral, rituals take place at dawn on Fridays and Sundays, or whenever there is a need to do good for humanity. Many devotees attend the Pretor in the astral body. There are also athletes of the science of Jinas, who go in their physical body to the Pretor. There all these devotees have the privilege of receiving the bread and the wine.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
Whosoever reads our books and practices sexual magic will be internally connected with this temple. The disciple can also go there with his body of flesh and bones any time he wishes to do so. This can be done by practicing the procedure that I teach in the fifth chapter (“Humans and Lands in Jinn State”).
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practiceNight 14
It is also indispensable that the disciple learns to “enter” through the doors of those “sidereal” temples in the astral body. The main exercises of Gemini have as objective, to learn the use and maneuver of the astral body. In this sign, we also teach our disciples the secret art of the “Jinn” states, that will allow them to “carry” their physical bodies to the most secluded and remote places of the earth, in a few instants. We will give various clues in a numerical form: 1st The disciple should lie on his bed in a horizontal position. Relax the body so that no muscle applies pressure on the astral body. Become drowsy pronouncing the mantram “Rusti” like this: Ruuuuuuussssstiiiiiii. This mantram is pronounced mentally. In those instants, the student should become a “spy of his own sleep”
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
5. To converse with the sidereal Gods we should learn to leave our physical body. 6. In Astral body we have learn to transport ourselves to the temple of the sidereal Gods. 7. Being outside the body the magician walks in circles from right to left, placing the imagination and will on the planetary temple he desires to visit. 8. Then the magician will follow a straight line walking in the direction of the temple. 9. To the right of every cosmic temple there is a white column.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition, Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
10. To the left of every cosmic temple there is a black column. 11. The magician greets the guardian on the right, saying: JACHIN 12. The magician greets the guardian on the left, saying: BOHAZ. 13. In the interior of the temple we can speak with the planetary Gods to get to know our authentic and legitimate horoscopes.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
31. The disciple will sit comfortably in a chair and will then concentrate his Mind on his INNER-SELF, saying: 32. “You who art myself, my true BEING. 33. Leave my body, enter the doors of the heart temple of (here one names the planet which one will work with in those instants).” 34. Then the words, JACHIN, BOHAZ are pronounced.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
35. Next, the Magician asks the Sidereal Genie with whom one is working, for the desired service: love, journeys, business, etc. 36. The magician will clamor several times asking for: CHORUS, CHORUS, CHORUS; and the angels will work, but according to the Law. 37. The planetary LOGOS will send choruses of angels to work with the magician, to dominate and overcome. 38. This is how one works with the ray of the stars. This is how our disciples can solve their particular problems.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
There is a key to transfer oneself to that constellation. The key is to meditate profoundly on a “yellow stone” that exists in the astral. Do this exercise in the moments of transition between vigil and sleep and thou shall then transfer thyself in the astral body to the largest star of the ‘Ursa Major’, where a powerful and gigantic civilization exists. Since the seventeenth century, the earth entered a new era of spiritual awakening. That awakening will shine in all its splendor in the sign of Aquarius, the present era. The cause of that awakening is due to the influence of the great enlightened “Buddha” who in the seventeenth century became the redeemer of the Martian humanity, was crucified in the forces of Mars, to redeem the Martians and help our terrestrial humanity with “BuddhicMartian” forces that radiate from Mars. Michael, Gabriel, Raphael and Orifiel are the four Lords that rule the karmic balance of the four winds (North, South, East and West). These are the four angels of the four cardinal points of the earth. Esoteric Astrology should live within the law of perfect equilibrium.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
A practice
Ancient men grew spiritually under the influence of the “Ursa Major” and students should meditate intensely on the ‘Ursa Major’ if they want to awaken consciousness. That constellation radiates powerful spiritual forces and man should learn to converse with the sidereal genii of that constellation.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Awakening, Zodiacal Course
A practice
The Chela (disciple) who wants to visit the morning star with his astral body will operate in the following way: With his body well relaxed, he will lay down. He will get a little bit drowsy and will vocalize with his mind the following prayer: Llanos... Llanos... Llanos... Help me, Lla... ma... dor... Lla... ma... dor... Lla... nos... Lla... nos... Lla... nos...
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The Rose is the queen of the flowers. The Rose is influenced by Venus, the star of love, the morning star. A great ineffable Master lives in that star. The name of this Master is ‘Llanos’ (pronounced Janos).
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Then, when the disciple finds himself already drowsy (half asleep), he must sit softly on his bed, throw the blanket off of him with which he is covered and get down from his bed. Thus, when he is standing on the floor, he must jump with the intention of floating within the air. If he floats, then he must go out from his house while floating in the atmosphere and while pronouncing the invocation of the Master Llanos, pronouncing it in the same way as when he was doing it on his bed.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The Master Llanos is an inhabitant of the planet Venus. He will hear the call from the invoker (the llamador). He will help him in order to arrive to Venus, the star of the Roses, the morning star.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The disciple will be welcomed by the Master Llanos when arriving to Venus and if he wants wisdom, then, the Master will illuminate him. The disciple will be overwhelmed because of the ineffable resplendence which springs out from the aura and from the diamond tunic of the Master Llanos. This Master has already united himself with his Glorian. Therefore, he wears a diamond tunic.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
During the hour of Venus, the astral atmosphere is filled with a pink light of ineffable beauty.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
We can visit Nirvana with our astral body. The yogis from India, while in the state of Samadhi, visit Nirvana with their mental body or causal body. However, to pretend to visit Nirvana with black magic procedures is the breaking point of madness.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
The Gnostic knows how to enter into Nirvana by utilizing the powers of his Intimate. When the Gnostic wants to visit Nirvana he does the following: First, he leaves his physical body and departs in his astral body.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
Second, when he is already out of his physical body, then he prays to his Intimate as follows: “Father of mine, take me to Nirvana.” Then, the Intimate transports the soul of the Gnostic towards the ineffable joys of Nirvana.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
The disciple will start to learn how to depart from his physical body in his astral vehicle. Later on, when he is Out of his body, he will beg his Intimate to take his inferior vehicles out from him. Then, his Intimate will take his astral, mental, causal, etc., vehicles out from the atomic doors of his spinal column. When we are without those inferior vehicles, we learn to move ourselves in the Buddhic and Atmic vehicles by will.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
This interesting experiment is performed in the following way: 1. The Magician must abandon his physical body and depart within his astral body. 2. Once Out, he must feel himself having a childlike heart. 3. Then, he must command his astral body as follows: “Astral Body, withdraw from me.” 4. He must cast his Astral Body out from himself, through his spinal column.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
5. Subsequently, his Astral Body will fall out of him from his back and will go out. 6. The disciple will remain within his Mental Body. 7. Now, he has to command his Mental Body as follows: “Mental Body, withdraw from me.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
8. The disciple must throw his Mental Body out towards his back. 9. Now, the Magician will feel that something else is moving within his own Being. 10. At this moment, a rare personage comes out from his spinal column. 11. The disciple must question this rare personage: “Who are you?” 12. This subject will answer as follows: “I am your Mental Body. Do you not know me?” 13. The disciple must now invite his own Mind to sit.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
In order to become fused with Atman the following experience is necessary: to project the Astral body, abandoning the Physical body. One then sheds the Astral body by ordering it “leave me”; this requires will. The Astral body leaves via the spinal column, and we are left in the world of the Mind. Later one sheds the Mental body, ordering it: “Mental body, leave me”. This is realised by an act of will, and one is left with the Causal body, which one also orders to leave; this also requires a great effort. The body of Conscious Will functions better, and one commands it to leave and to abandon the 33 vertebra, the Buddhic or Intuitional body thus remaining; which is very obedient. It also is commanded to leave, one thus remaining in the world of Chesed, of Atman, the Ineffable. In the world of Atman one feels a Complete Man. Here, the intellectual animal is not a Man. The Initiate feels filled with an immense plentitude. There, in that world he is a “Real Man” in the most objective sense.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978 also in Desire and Will
The world of Atman is a positive state; its negative part is the physical world. In Atman a city is seen in its most real form; there, a table is seen with all of its parts, above, below, within, from outside; the same is also true for a mountain. In the kitchen one sees the number of atoms which give form to a piece of cutlery, the number of molecules which are con tamed in the bread or meat which one is about to eat. Not only do we perceive solids in an integral form, but also hypersolids, including the exact quantity of atoms which together constitute the entirety of any body.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
IITravel in the Astral body to the offices of Karma
The tribunals of Karma as the traveller meets them, and the dead who are met while out of the body.
5. Our disciples should learn to go in the Astral body to the offices of the Lards of Karma.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
14. However I tell thee that it is better to travel in the Astral body to the offices of Karma to speak personally with the Judges of the Law.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
6. Those who learn how to control their Ka (Astral body) can visit the Temple of the Jackal of jackals in order to consult their book and to make their negotiations. 7. Whosoever has capital to pay, pays and does well in his negotiations.
Treatise of Sexual Alchemy, 1954
13. The Yogi must learn how to travel in his Astral body so that he can visit the Temple of Anubis and his 42 Judges.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
An account
I said goodbye to the Guardian. A few days passed by and I could not understand this at all. What does it mean for me to look for my mom? But if she died, where am I going to look for her? Well, I had thousands of conjectures in my poor brain until, at last, one of those many days, a little light bulb turned on over here and then I understood. “Oh, right!” I said, “the Guardian of the Temple refers to my Divine Mother Kundalini, the Igneous Serpent of our magic powers. Now I know; I am going to concentrate on her.” I lied down again on my back, with my head to the north, my body relaxed, in profound inner meditation, but praying to my Divine Mother Kundalini. I prayed, but from time to time that worry arose in me: “If I end up in another apartment... Good God!”
The Fifth Gospel Didactic Synopsis of Mystical Death
An account
“Well, frankly, no, I do not know.” “I am telling it to you for your own good” he replied. “Well, I am going to try to understand what it is you want to tell me.”
The Fifth Gospel Didactic Synopsis of Mystical Death
An account
Thus I was with that worry, and the concentration was more and more tremendous. Suddenly, she, Devi Kundalini-Shakti, took me out of the physical body and took me to Europe, to Paris. Once in that city, she led me before a great Palace of Karma. The audience room was full of people. Some police officers –Lords of the Law– accompanied me. I said: “Well, well, well, what have I gotten myself into for being involved in these things!” And those police advanced with me through the center of the room up to the table where the Judges were. One of them –he was in the middle of the table– opened a great book and read to me some mischief that I had gotten up to during my time as a fallen Bodhisattva, back in the Middle Ages, at the time when the Catholic Inquisition burned people alive at the stake. I no longer recalled such mischiefs, mischiefs of Don Juan Tenorio and his followers. So. That man read that book, he read the karma, certain bad deeds –romantic, by the way, yes–, and then, he condemned me to the death penalty! “Oh, it is worse,” I said, “now indeed it was worthless to have worked for the little brothers there in the physical world! Look, look, look in what have I ended up!” I waited to see what else was going to happen. The Judge calls an Executioner of the Law. I know that there were two such Cosmic Executioners in the ancient Egypt of the Pharaohs. He calls one and gives him the order to execute me immediately. I, a poor fool, standing there before such terrible Lords, what could I do? The Executioner unsheathes the flaming sword –the Cosmic Executioner, because there are Cosmic Executioners– and advances toward me with the unsheathed sword. Well, that was a moment when, frankly, I felt totally let down. In a split second I thought of so many things. I said to myself: “So much suffering in life, fighting for humanity, fighting for myself, writing books, giving conferences, and now, this is the result? How painful! Well, well, well, in what have I ended up! It was useless for me then to have fought so much for humanity.”
The Fifth Gospel Didactic Synopsis of Mystical Death
An account
It happened, at last, that one day mortally wounded at the bottom of my soul, I appealed to my Divine Mother Kundalini asking for help and this help was granted immediately... One night, my adorable mother took me out of the physical body and took me before the tribunals of objective justice.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Great was my terror when I saw myself in the presence of the judges of the tribunal of Karma. Many people filled the hall, there was dread on all the faces and anguish in all the hearts. I advanced some steps into the room of Truth-Justice, the judge opened the book and read crimes against the Goddess Moon, adventures of Don Juan, the epoch of the medieval troubadours and of the knights-errant and feudal cities.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Then in a loud voice, he pronounced the sentence of death and ordered the cosmic executioner, in an imperial manner to carry out the sentence inmediatly.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
I still remember the unspeakable terror of those instants, my legs trembled in the precise moment when the executioner unsheathed his flaming sword, and directed it in a menacing manner towards my defenseless person.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
We, the Gnostics, learn to leave the physical body at will; thus, we can visit the world of the dead. On some occasions the defunct can bring the souls of their friends; this occurs especially during sleep, but they have to return to the physical world upon awakening from normal sleep. This signifies that the visit to the world of the dead is made during the sleep of the body.
Beyond Death
Whoever does this will be able to investigate, by himself, what we are saying about death; he will see the deceased, those who have already abandoned the physical body, he will be able to converse with them, face to face, see them, touch them, feel them.
The Fifth Gospel The Reality and Fantasy of our Psychology Public Lecture – 1976
A practice
It is fundamental not to panic, that is, not get frightened, not be afraid. Afterwards, leave the room with courage, really go out into the street; float about the surrounding environment within the unknown dimension, within the fifth coordinate.
The Fifth Gospel The Reality and Fantasy of our Psychology Public Lecture – 1976 also in Fear
An account
One day Juan met a man in his Astral Body, who traveled by foot on a highway! This subject was a loader and carried a huge load, which weighed too much, on his back. When Juan saw him, he was able to perceive details: said subject was a deceased man! He had disembodied some time ago! Now, in the Astral Body, he wandered on the highway. That man was firmly convinced that he was in the Physical Body. He ignored that data about his death! He walked with an asleep conscience. The load he carried on his robust shoulders was nothing else but a Mental Image created by himself. That poor man had been a loader and still, after his death, continued in his trade of transporting loads.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening
An account
Juan wanted to help him awaken consciousness and told him: “Friend, become aware of your situation. Remember that you are already dead; you don’t even have a Physical Body.” That man looked at Juan with the eyes of a somnambulist He did not understand what Juan was trying to make him comprehend. Juan, floating around him, made another attempt. But everything was futile! That man’s conscience was asleep and all attempts to awaken it was a total failure.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Awakening, Identification
An account
He also looked at me with the eyes of a sleepwalker; he understood not even one iota of what I was saying to him. I decided to float around him and over his head, to see if in that way maybe he would understand, but everything was useless: he understood nothing. He was asleep. The poor wretch had done nothing in life to awaken his Consciousness, and he continued to be asleep, with an asleep Consciousness. I continued my journey to California; I needed to do the investigations and I did them –some investigations regarding some schools, etc.–. Afterward, I returned calmly to my physical body.
The Fifth Gospel Gnostic Discipline for Awakening Interview – Mexico City – 1970
An account
Everything was useless, that poor dead person did not understand me; he had his consciousness too asleep. Wanting to help him, I floated around him in the surrounding atmosphere with the purpose of alarming him, making him understand that something strange was happening in his existence, making him realize in some way that he was dead, etc., etc., but everything was useless.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Afterwards, once the necessary investigations were made, I returned to my physical vehicle that lay sleeping on the bed.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
I will illustrate this answer with an account of a suprasensible type. Finding myself outside of my physical body, in instants in which I slept profoundly on the bed, I invoked a certain disembodied person that in life was a member of the family, to be sure, a close one.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
In the first case, the mind projects what it has subconsciously elaborated and, identified with such projections, falls into fascination and in the dreams characteristic of unconsciousness.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973 also in Identification
In the second case, the mind has exhausted the process of thinking; it does not project, it is open to the new, it receives without identification and in absence of all fascination and of every dreamlike process.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973 also in Identification
An account
The dead person presented himself attired in a certain gray suit that he wore in life; he came laughing alone, he seemed truly somnambulist, he conversed nonsense, something that he had heard someone say... Useless were my efforts to make him recognize me; the wretched person slept profoundly; certainly he did not see me; in essence, he really perceived exclusively his own mental forms and laughed like a lunatic, like an idiot. Here we have two aspects that come to clarify then, the matter in question. That dead person projected his own mental forms, he dreamed them, he was absolutely fascinated with them and did not even perceive me.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973 also in Identification
An account
In the second case, I was completely conscious, awake I knew that my physical body had remained asleep in bed I was not projecting; I had exhausted the thinking process, I became open to the new, I received the disembodied person, I investigated him, I realized the deplorable state in which he was.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973 also in Awakening
Question: Venerable Master, regarding the exercise of the division of attention in three parts that is done here in the physical world, how is it that it can have repercussions in the astral world, if both worlds are totally different?
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
IIIThis is a very dangerous hour for astral projection
The dangers found while out of the body and how to defend oneself: the tenebrous ones who attack in dreams, the chamber of witchcraft, the hour of Venus, and his own meetings with dark powers.
The brothers of the different spiritualist schools live in the astral with an asleep consciousness. When a brother enters the path, the tenebrous ones of the lunar path customarily attack him during his dreams. The brothers of the shadow take up the figure of the guru to lead disciples astray. We should now comprehend that it is a crime not to teach disciples the practical use and handling of the astral body. It is necessary for disciples to awaken consciousness during sleep in order for them to be able to defend themselves from tenebrous attacks.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Awakening
If the occult investigator enters the chamber of witchcraft with his astral body, he will inevitably find himself before a very beautiful and elegant spiral staircase that leads to the most secret part of the precinct. This is an elegant room decorated with all the splendid luxury of the stately mansions of the 18th century. There glitter the mirrors of the thousand and One Nights, the magic carpets, and all the malign beauty of Nahemah. The governor of that fatal mansion is Don Ramon Rubifero, distinguished Knight of the Black Grail, horrible demon of Darkness.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
The Pentagram is the symbol of the Universal Word of Life. With certain secret mantra the Pentagram can be made to shine instantly. In the Gopalätapani and Krisna Upanishad we have found the mantram that has the power to instantly form the terrible Flaming Star in the astral plane, before which demons flee in terror. This mantram is made up of five parts, which are: KLIM KRISHNAYA GOVINDAYA GOPIJANA VALLABHAYA SWAHA. By vocalising this mantram, the Flaming Star is instantly formed, before which the tenebrous of the eighteenth arcanum flee in terror. These demons violently attack the Initiate when he is working in the Great Work. The devotees of the Perfect Matrimony have to wage tremendous battles against the tenebrous. Each vertebra of the spinal column represents terrible battles against the black magicians. They struggle to deviate the student from the Path of the Razor’s Edge.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
The powerful mantram mentioned above has three perfectly defined stages. On reciting KLIM, which the occultists of India call the “seed of attraction”, we provoke a flow of Christic energy, which descends instantly from the world of the Solar Logos to protect us, and then a mysterious door opens downwards. Then, by means of the three following parts of the mantram, he who has recited it is infused with Christic energy; and finally, by means of the fifth part, he who has received the Christic energy can radiate it with tremendous force to defend himself from the tenebrous. They then flee in terror. The Word always crystallizes in geometric lines. This is demonstrated by magnetic tapes. When speech is recorded on a tape each letter crystallizes into geometric forms. Afterwards, it is sufficient to make the tape vibrate in the tape recorder for the speech to be repeated God geometries. The word takes on geometric forms. This mantra cited by us has the power to form the Flaming Star instantly in the supersensitive worlds. This star is a vehicle of Christic force. This star represents the Word. Everyone who is working in the Fiery Forge of Vulcan can defend themselves with this powerful mantram. This mantram is vocalized by pronouncing each syllable. With this mantram one can conjure demons that control the possessed. It is urgent to learn how to create the Flaming Star instantly. With this mantram we can create that star to combat the tenebrous.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in Elemental Magic, The Perfect Matrimony
An account
A Guru once told me the following: “My son, this is a very dangerous hour for astral projection, because all the world is filled with a pink light...”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
This Master was right. If it is true that in the hour of Venus the positive ray from this star is filling everything with light, music and love, it is also true and very real that the negative ray from Lucifer-Venus, that is the ray of the Black Magician Lucifer and of all of the Lucifers and tenebrous Initiates from the copper cauldron, is also active. Yet, if the disciple lives a pure and chaste life, then he will have nothing to fear of the Magicians from darkness. Fortunately, Lucifer and the Lucifers have already fallen into the abyss...
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The ideal moment for astral projection is that of the dawn, the hour of Venus. If one is however, not at a very pure level, the Luciferic currents pull on one. Remember VenusLucifer which has two aspects, just as there is the Sacred Fire which rises, Kundalini, there is the fire which descends, Kundartiguador.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
The Astral is governed by the Moon; it is due to this that astral projection is made easier with the waxing Moon, and a little more arduous with the waning Moon.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
An account
Certainly, he was always hurling terrible threats upon me. Yet, I always defeated him with my mantras, and thus I was accompanying him into his caverns within the astral plane. I reached even to the point of taking part in his feasts, pretending to be a black magician, and even his comrade. This was in order to more closely study this personage. My intentions in the long run were to perform the greatest task in the cosmos, which was to take Beelzebub out from the Black Lodge, and transform him into a disciple of the White Lodge.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
I, Samael Aun Weor, was always observing Beelzebub in the astral plane. I tried to gain his affection because what kept calling my attention was the overwhelming fact that he was irradiating love towards his friends.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
He was a very rare and unique case among his kind because I had never heard of a demon whose aura was irradiating a blue light, which is that of love.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
My disciples were considering this task to be something truly impossible. Beelzebub did not stop threatening me, nevertheless, in spite of everything, I did not dismay. Finally, there was a curious event, which did assure my intentions. One night, I, along with a chela, invoked Beelzebub in the astral plane. Once he concurred to our call, we invited him to dinner. He accepted our invitation, and we went into a restaurant of the astral plane. As we already explained, the astral body also eats elements, which are related to its organism. Thus, the astral world is almost similar to our own physical world. So, I asked food for Beelzebub, while I contented myself to drink a glass of water. When Beelzebub sat at the table, he took the biretta off from his head and began to eat in a gentleman-like manner.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
It was intriguing to see that type of gorilla eating at the table like a great lord. Some chelas who were in that place addressed me and told me that I was being disrespectful in bringing a demon into that place.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
As it was expected, they were looking at him with disgust, and soon they began to vacate the place. Notwithstanding, I answered them: “This is also a man and he deserves to be respected” Then, Beelzebub took the floor and in a profoundly sad tone, he said: “Everybody despises me, the only one who does not despise me is my friend Samael Aun Weor.”
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950 also in Hatred
An account
This was the astral experience that did encourage me to continue with my longed for purpose, which was to take Beelzebub out from the Black Lodge and to make him a disciple of the White Fraternity.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
We left our body at will. In our astral body we went by a solitary road. As we walked, we invoked Chavajoth, the mysterious personage mentioned by the great King Solomon. We must confess that we had to utilize the grand and supreme Appellation of “Peter of Apono”
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959
An account
On another night, we, the investigators, abandoned the body with the purpose of talking more closely with the Antithesis of the Lord Jehovah. As usual, we made use of the Grand Appellation of Peter of Apono. After a few moments, we arrived at a street of an unknown town. A multitude of people came and went, there and everywhere. As we appealed, we could easily appreciate the power bf the Verb. The Verb was transforming everything... We changed planes. We submerged ourselves in those atomic regions where the Princes of Darkness inhabited! Observing carefully, we noticed that some one approached us with decided and firm steps. It was Chavajoth!... That sinister personage was dressed in his blood colored robe and came towards us. We then conjured him saying: “In the name of Jupiter, the Father of the Gods, I conjure thee, Chavajoth, TE VIGOS CO SLIM.”
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic, Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
An account
These Mantrams have a tremendous effect. Chavajoth, as if wounded by a mortal ray, raised his arm as if to defend him self. We advanced a few steps, approached him and stretched out our hand to him in a friendly gesture. He, then, in a rude tone and using names applicable only to prostitutes, asked us about our wives. We, with a severe spirit, and without letting our selves be carried away by any emotional or sentimental reaction, answered that person age that our wives were quite well... Thanks! Next, we manifested to him that we wanted to be his friends. The sinister personage showed himself satisfied, and then, walked with us towards a tenebrous cavern. We walked until we reached the peak of a high mountain. There he had his tenebrous cavern. There he taught his disciples. He manifested to us that he lived in Germany; that he had a physical body; that he worked for the Grand Black Lodge; that he was impersonating a War Veteran, etc. Certainly, we found Chavajoth’s cavern full of German disciples. Those disciples came to say cavern in their astral body. Chavajoth taught them the doctrine of the Nicolites. That tenebrous doctrine taught a sinister System of Sexual Magic, during which the magician commits the crime of ejaculating the seminal liquor. The result of those exercises is always disastrous. The Fiery Serpent of our magical powers, then, instead of rising, descends to the atomic infernos of man and becomes the tail of Satan. The LemurianAtlantean monsters practiced this System of Black Sexual Magic. The sorcerers of Atlantis also practiced it. In that old vanished continent, existed the cult to the goddess Kali. Later, after the submersion of Atlantis, the sect of the goddess was established in India. That is the sect of the stranglers. The fanatics of that sect strangled their victims. The English police had to intervene many times, in India, to judge that type of criminals... That is Tantrism! In our western world, many were the instructors who, after having been in the White Lodge, went astray in the horrible tantric path. Therefore, we arrived at the conclusion that Chavajoth is an Adept of the Shadows, the Antithesis of the Lord Jehovah. He is the Head of a Fatal Legion! He works for the Tenebrous Fraternity. One has to conjure him in the name of Jehovah!
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic, Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy
An account
Some days later, we, the investigators, in the astral body, decided to invoke this pair of Opposites of Philosophy: JEHOVAH and CHAVAJOTH. We made a circle around us...
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959
An account
One night, we left in the astral body. We entered a subterranean cavern. Once there, by making use of the Grand Appellation of Peter of Apono, we invoked Andrameleck. A personage as black as coal finally appeared in the middle of the cavern; a gigantic personage, tenebrous and horrible. We extended our right hand towards that horrible monster, and said: “In the name of Jupiter, the father of the Gods I conjure thee Andrameleck!... TE VIGOS CO SLIM!...”
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic
An account
The result was formidable. That demon, mortally wounded by the terrible ray of Divine Justice, remained under our dominion. It was then that Andrameleck spoke and said: “I did not know that it was you calling me! If I had known it, I would have come earlier!... What is it that I can do for you?” These words of Andrameleck seemed to come from within the profound caverns of the entire earth. It seemed that this terrible and powerful voice came from the very inner center of the earth! We then courageously spoke to Andrameleck, telling him: “Give me your hand Andrameleck!” The tenebrous personage approached us and gave us his hand. Then the author of this book returned to his physical body. Then, that demon, with his bloody-red-colored robe, passing over the roof of his room, exclaimed: “You were afraid of me!... You were afraid of me!...”
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic
An account
It was then that the brother who directed the Chain went, in the astral body to all the countries of the Earth, seeking the brother who had fled. He wanted that brother to speak to Andrameleck. Everything was useless! The search was fruitless... Brother C was nowhere to be found...! Where could he be? Where could he have gone? Enigmas! Enigmas!... The brother, director of the Chain, returned once again to the room where Andrameleck was. However, it was no longer possible for him to talk to that marvelous Giant, because many people in their astral body were consulting him. Then, the brother who directed the Chain, returned to his physical body. Once in his body, that brother rose very early in the morning, had breakfast arid left for the street... Where was he going? Well, if you do not know it beloved reader, know it now. The director of the Chain went in search of brother C. That brother was an old businessman, and it would be very easy for the director of the chain to find him in his store. Certainly, he found him there! Brother C. was busy in the commerce of his store. The director of the Chain, after courteously greeting his friend C. questioned him saying: “Well, brother!... Why did you flee from Andrameleck’s sight?” Then brother C. answered him: “In reality, I was unable to resist Andrameleck’s look! He looked at me with a terrible electric force! I could not bear it! I was afraid and I fled!...” It was then that the director of the Chain told brother C.: “Man, I looked for you in the astral body everywhere, and did not find you!” Brother C. responded: “You did not find me... because I returned to my body!”
Esoteric Treatise of Theurgy, 1959
IVI abandoned my dense body
Accounts of journeys out of the body: his first unfoldment, told in full, the journeys of students and of the mystic Oramamme, and his own later journeys.
An account
With the greatest pleasure, distinguished lady, I am going to narrate a personal case to you. I want to tell you about my first unfoldment. I was still very young when I resolved to unfold myself at will. I remember clearly that at that time I placed much attention on the process of sleep and, when already feeling myself dozing into that transitional state that exists between vigil and sleep, I acted intelligently.
Beyond Death
An account
I did not begin to think that I was going to unfold, because it is obvious that if I would have remained thinking I would not have carried out the longed for experiment. I repeat: I acted. I got up very gently from my own bed and upon doing it, it produced a very natural separation between the soul and the body. The soul remained outside and the body remained asleep in the bed.
Beyond Death
An account
I went from my house to the street in a clear and spontaneous way, and later walked down a solitary street. Stopping myself at the next street corner, I reflected for some moments on the place where I should direct myself; I resolved to go to Europe.
Beyond Death
An account
It is ostensible that I had to travel over the waters of the Atlantic, floating marvelously in luminous space. I felt myself full of a happiness inconceivable for human beings and finally I arrived at the city of Paris.
Beyond Death
An account
Walking, or better said, floating in this luminous atmosphere, I instinctively felt the necessity to enter into a house.
Beyond Death
An account
I do not regret to have penetrated into that certain residence, what was curious about this case was the encounter with an initiate whom I had known in former reincarnations. He was also out of his body; I was able to verify for certain that his body was lying asleep in his bed; beside him I saw a woman and two children who were also asleep; I understood that they were his wife and children.
Beyond Death
An account
I affectionately greeted my friend and the soul of his wife, who was also outside of her body. It is not useless to say that since the children were asleep, their souls were outside. I was about to frighten those infant souls with my unfamiliar presence; I comprehended the necessity to move back so as to avoid those frightened souls returning to their respective bodies. There is no doubt that if this would have happened, the children would have cried in their bed and their crying would have awoken my friend and his wife; the dialogue would have then been suspended. The soul of my friend as well as his wife’s soul would have found themselves obligated to penetrate into their respective bodies of flesh and bone.
Beyond Death
An account
I comprehended all of this in thousandths of a second, and in order to precisely avoid this problem, I proposed to my friend to leave the house to go with me to take a walk through the streets of Paris; my joy was great when he accepted.
Beyond Death
An account
We went together to the outskirts of that great city and I even advised him to return to the way entering onto the Path of the Light. Finally, I proposed to him to go visit a marvelous Temple that exists in Germany; my friend declined this invitation telling me that he could not do this, because he must concentrate his attention on the problems of practical life, since he had a wife, children, etc., etc. I took leave of that initiate and, suspending myself in the atmosphere, I passed over some great walls, and then I went by a highway, by a serpentine road full of curves, until I arrived at a marvelous Temple. In front of this sanctuary I saw many souls of different nationalities, people who during the hours of sleep escaped from their dense body so as to arrive here. All those people, reunited in different groups, were chatting amongst themselves; speaking of the cosmos, of the laws of reincarnation and of karma, of the mysteries of life and death, etc., etc., etc. I looked amongst all these groups for a certain friend capable of unfolding, but I did not find one. Then I approached up to the threshold of the Temple and I saw an exquisite garden with delightful flowers that were exhaling an intoxicating perfume; in the back the silhouette of a resplendent Temple stood out illuminated by the splendor of the stars. I wanted to enter, but the guardian intervened saying to me: “This is a Temple of Wisdom. Be gone, it is not yet time.”
Beyond Death
An account
Obeying the orders, I withdrew myself a certain distance without moving too far away from the Threshold. Then I looked at myself, I observed my spiritual hands and feet and even gave myself the luxury of comparing them with the hands and feet of my body of flesh and bone that I had left asleep in my bed there, in Latin America, in the sacred land of the Aztecs.
Beyond Death
An account
It is evident that all these comparisons gave the result of returning me instantaneously to my material physical vehicle, which was snoring deeply asleep in the bed. I then suddenly awoke saying to myself: “I was in the Temple of Wisdom. What joy! What happiness!” Today I still cannot forget that light so white, so immaculate, which was shining in that sanctuary. Certainly, that light did not look like any other physical light. It went everywhere and did not make a shadow of any kind.
Beyond Death
9. Can one travel anywhere, even without knowing the place? I went to that Divine Temple and, nevertheless, I did not know it. I carried myself away by, we could say, a superior telepathic sense. I can tell you that my own Spirit guided me.
Beyond Death
An account
1. On a certain occasion while I was trying to do a meditative exercise in the country, I felt myself leaving my body, as if I was shaking. Suddenly, I felt that I was flying at a great velocity, reaching Egypt in a couple of seconds. I descended very close to the Sphinx, feeling the warmth of the sand on the soles of my feet, being able to touch the enormous and eroded rocks of the gigantic monument. It was a great surprise for me to see such a clear panorama and such a vivid perception of the sky and a soft breeze that came from the river Nile that stirred some large and slender palm trees.
Beyond Death
An account
After a brief rest, I felt a special attraction that made me elevate myself from the ground, floating up approximately to the height of the nose of the Sphinx, in which there was a little cavity whereby I penetrated toward a stairway that descended narrowly and was semi-illuminated, which led to the door of a chamber where I encountered a guardian clothed with a pinafore, golden sandals, a headdress with a golden diadem, that resembled a cobra preparing to bite, and in his right hand a lance that prevented me from entering. His eyes were a very penetrating blue-green and his skin of a dark complexion. He did not utter even a single word, just examined me and gave a salutation, which I answered. He smiled and, drawing back the lance with an amiable reverence, he let me go in. I entered into a great chamber where some very delicate songs were heard from a choir that uttered prayers in the form of delightful songs.
Beyond Death
An account
There was smoke in the atmosphere from a pink-colored incense that smelled like an extract of red roses and which made my body vibrate from head to toe. There were also many Egyptian symbols on the walls that, in spite of not understanding, seemed very familiar to me. After seeing the rich decoration of that chamber, which undoubtedly must be a very special temple, a gong sounded and three Masters appeared who had peaceful and venerable faces, but a very penetrating look; two of them came vested in yellow and one with an extremely white tunic. After greeting me, they welcomed me with a very brotherly hug. They then officiated a mass on an altar that was between two enormous columns with a large golden scarab that was shining within the smoke of the incense; then a font of crystalline water was illuminated that I had not noticed before. They brought me near to it and I began to see myself with a horrible black and hairy face like an orangutan. Then I saw many passages of my life wherein I committed all kinds of sin. I ended whining and crying. They then admonished me and gave me advice in symbolic form, handing over to me a scarab of solid gold; they put it into my right hand, closed it, and pronounced some words that I did not understand, telling me that I may keep it and make myself worthy to always have it at my side. Afterwards, they blessed me and I returned to my body awakening instantaneously, very moved, and even until this day I have not forgotten any details. Could you tell me what happened and what significance all this has for me?
Beyond Death
With great pleasure I will answer your question. Whichever way you look at it it’s crystal clear; it’s an astral unfoldment. You fell asleep while you were meditating and praying and then your soul left your body and brought you to Egypt, the Sacred Land of the Pharaohs.
Beyond Death
With great pleasure I will respond to your question. Now you see what meditation and prayer are. If a person of good will devotes himself to prayer and meditation, he can have the happiness of arriving at ecstasy. Then the soul leaves the body, as we have already explained many times, and travels to any remote place on the Earth or in the Infinite.
Beyond Death
An account
1. One night in the year 1966, during one of the practices of astral projection, I succeeded in consciously leaving my body and felt a very special liberation, because my being felt an indescribable happiness and I flew; I flew like a bird up to an other planet unknown to me, but which had a lot of similarity with the Earth, since I saw enormous green forests full of pine trees and a log cabin in which there were some people signaling to me. I descended and came across the pleasant surprise that the Master Samael Aun Weor was there with some relatives and well-known disciples, who received me with a very effusive hug and a very special happiness that I cannot describe. Then the Master invited me to walk through the forest until coming to a stone bridge, where he explained to me that this planet was the Moon in past epochs, when it had inhabitants, animals and vegetation and that it was the Ancient Earth-Moon or MotherEarth-Moon and he showed me rivers, mountains and large seas. Could you explain to me how it is possible to visit another planet in epochs as distant as that one?
Beyond Death
Now you see, distinguished gentleman, what the unfoldment is; the soul then can transport itself to other planets and know many mysteries. You truly went in soul, in spirit, as I like to say, to that satellite which shines in the starry night.
Beyond Death
An account
The stories of these farmers produced a formidable effect on the spirit of Oramamme, that old initiate of the Greater Mysteries. This mystic wanted to attempt the ascension of Jurateña; he wanted to climb up to the snowy peak. However, this undertaking was difficult: it was necessary to bring supplies for fifteen days, to penetrate into the chasm of this deep forest. And the old mystic did not have the money to pay for the services of a guide and to buy the supplies. One morning, before dawn, the old initiates combined drowsiness with meditation. The old man was very tired; he was in a drowsy state; that is when he decided to meditate profoundly on the mountain of Jurateña. The result was marvelous. Oramamme saw the mountain of Jurateña enveloped by a thick cloud. The cloud dissipated slowly and then appeared before the clairvoyant sight of the old mystic a magnificent temple with its harmonious dome and its majestic marble columns. A path leads to that admirable Cathedral Temple. Oramamme had astrally projected himself, without knowing how or when. That projection was the result of the wise combination of meditation with sleepiness (or half-sleep state).
Mountain of Juratena
An account
The old mystic was then walking with his astral body towards the temple. A group of Masters dressed in their vestments of glory went out to greet him, full of joy and love. Oramamme was in ecstasy. There is no greater happiness than to feel our soul released, free. In the superior worlds, the past and the future join in an eternal now. There the past and future do not exist; there life is an eternal present, an eternal instant.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
When the old Oramamme crossed the threshold of the sacred temple of Jurateña, the holy Initiates of this venerable sanctuary gave him a silver spoon on the handle of which he read inscribed: Nourishment of the White Universal Brotherhood. The spoon contained pure bees’ honey.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
Invited by the holy Masters, the old mystic penetrated into the marvelous Sanctum of the temple of Jurateña. In this Sanctum, one perceived a seven branched candelabrum made of solid gold; and at the center there was a table and some chairs. Oramamme was invited to take his place and, almost immediately, he found himself sitting at the table.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
A great Adept of the White Lodge, also sitting at the table, came and stood before Oramamme. This Adept, dressed in his Guru tunic, look intensely at the mystic with his penetrating and divine eyes, the Master seemed to be examining the interior of the old initiate. Oramamme, filled of ecstasy, exclaimed: “Master! I came to ask for Initiation! Grant me Initiation, I want only one thing and that is Initiation!” thus exclaimed the old initiate, full of longing and ecstasy. The holy guru of Jurateña, impregnated with an awe-inspiring serenity, answered, “I will give the Bread of Wisdom.” The words of this Guru moved the deepest recesses of the soul of the old initiate. At that moment another Master of the temple entered the Sanctum. That Master was carrying a silver platter on which there was bread. This humble servant deposited the platter on the table; he then bowed reverently and left.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
The mystic went to sleep tranquilly; he became a watchman of his own sleep. The old mystic secretly watched over his own sleep. When the elder comprehended that his body was asleep, he got out of his bed. The result was astral projection. That had to be the inevitable result. That is how one projects the astral body. When the old initiate was outside of his body, he floated deliciously in his astral body. Then the elder remained ecstatic on contemplating the starry sky. The night was magnificent, sublime, ineffable… Full of enthusiasm the mystic cried out full of love and said, “Master, I have accomplished my pledge, now it is time.” That is how the hermit spoke and from Jurateña a telepathic order was issued. The mystic was ordered to descend to the abyss. The mystic obeyed and quickly descended to that region known in the Orient as Avitchi, eighth submerged sphere, the region where the adepts of the left hand inhabit, those of the Red Cap of Tibet, the tenebrous who follow the tantric teachings of Beelzebub, Gurdjieff(?)— originating from the Dagdugpa clan, lords of darkness denounced by the great Master Frances A. Propato.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
On another night, a very still and quiet night, the solitary mystic comprehended that it was the day and hour. Everything was ready, he had cleansed his stomach; he was ready.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
In the abyss horrible beasts attacked the old initiate. In the abyss the old mystic comprehended that he had to fight against the world, the devil and the flesh with the purpose of one day attaining the Venusian Initiation. The Tao is truly the Fourth Way; the path of the Gnostic Arhats.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
On another night, calm and pure… taking advantage of the sleepy state of his body the old mystic abandoned his corporeal form and went to the superior worlds. Oramamme begged a Guru to show him the times of the end. Then seeing himself with the consciousness of the future, the old mystic entered a large room where he announced before the auditorium that a cataclysm was approaching. The mystic spoke with prophetic consciousness; he announced a clash of worlds. A planet is drawing nearer, it is approaching, and when man tries to crush other planetary humanities, then the times of the end will occur. When that planetary mass crosses our terrestrial atmosphere, it will catch fire and when it falls hits our Earth, it will burn everything living. Then there will be an earthquake so enormous the likes of which has never been seen by man:
Mountain of Juratena
An account
We met a man named Juan. He was an excellent Theurgist! He knew how to consciously come out in the “Astral Body.” One night, the most peaceful, the most silent night, outside the physical body, Juan invoked the Holy Spirit... Suddenly a marvelous bird, a white dove of ineffable whiteness, with the head of a venerable elder and long white beard, deliciously floated over the head of the Theurgist. That so big and beautiful, pure Dove, with the head of a venerable elder, was something to see and admire! The white Dove settled on the shoulders of a friend of Juan, and whispered wise advice to his ear. Later, the Dove of ineffable whiteness, with the head of a venerable elder, stood before Juan. Filled with ecstasy, our good disciple questioned the Holy Spirit: “My Lord! Oh, My God! Tell me, how am I doing? ... Am I doing well?”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
The white Dove, taking the shape of a sublime human figure, spoke of love: “My son, you are not doing well!” Surprised, Juan asked again: “Lord, tell me, why am I not doing well?” And the Holy Spirit declared: “I am curing one of your patients, the ill woman who is under your responsibility; you are not the one curing her I am the one doing it, and yet — you have charged money! That money you received should be returned. It was give to you with much sacrifice!”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Logos, Mantram, Theurgy
An account
On another profound and silent night, Juan took advantage of the instance of transition between vigil and sleep. He arose from his bed and the result was UNFOLDMENT! Juan, in his astral body, moved joyfully and happily. Suddenly he felt attracted towards the South Pole, towards the Continent of Antarctica. Juan, deliciously floating in the astral plane, arrived at the glacial regions of the South Pole. When the Theurgist raised his eyes to the infinite, he saw a Star shine full of Glory. That Star glittered marvelously. Juan felt in his conscience that this Star was calling him, and floating in space, he reached 11, He saw that the Star was the Ancient of the Days, the Father who is in Secret, his own venerable Old Man! Actually, each of us has in the depth of his conscience, a Venerable Old Man; he is the First Logos. The Kabbalists call him Kether. The good Old Man entered the Soul of Juan, and the latter felt he was transformed. He saw himself surrounded by an immense aura with which he engulfed the entire Planetary Globe. The Theurgist walked; he was full with a happiness Impossible to describe with words. When Juan returned to his Physical Body, he comprehended that in the World of the First Logos neither INDIVIDUALITY PERSONALITY, nor any type of superior or inferior I exist.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
One night Juan unfastened himself from his Physical Body. Undoubtedly, he was skillful In the “Unfoldment” He knew to “consciously travel” in the Astral Body, he was a competent Investigator of the Superior Worlds. Once out of the Physical Body, Juan felt himself invaded by an inexpressible spiritual voluptuousness. There isn’t a greater pleasure than that of feeling the Soul “detached.” There, in the Internal Worlds, the past and the future merge within an eternal now! There, Time does not exist! Juan felt happy. He entered through the doors of a Temple, following his own mystical inspiration. The marvelous Theurgist invoked the Angel Aroch, Angel of Command. He made the Invocation in the following manner: “In the name of Christ, by the power of Christ, by the majesty of Christ, I summon thee Angel Aroch! Angel Aroch! Angel Aroch!”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Logos, Mantram, Theurgy
An account
The result was surprising. A few instants later, a beautiful boy of about 12 years of age entered through the doors of the Temple. That was the Angel Aroch! That angel evolves in the Ray of Strength, and works intensely with the disciples who tread the Path of Adeptship. Dressed in a white robe, that precious child saluted Juan and sat at his side, before a table of the Temple. Juan then consulted him on various things and at the same time presented a complaint: certain tenebrous ones from a School of Black Magic were horribly defaming the Gnostic teachings.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
An account
Then, I abandoned my dense body, and dressed with the wedding garment of the soul, I entered into the Superior Worlds.
My Return to Tibet, 1969
An account
What subsequently happened in those one-thousand-and-one-nights regions is well known by the Gods…
My Return to Tibet, 1969
An account
I was still very young and she (the starry night) was named Urania. So, on one of those nights, it does not matter which one, I abandoned this physical body for a while. How happy I felt while out of the dense body. There is no better pleasure than feeling oneself as a detached soul. Past, present and future become an eternal now. To penetrate within the parallel universes becomes relatively easy when one has the consciousness awakened.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
While in the parallel universe of the fifth dimension, I felt the necessity of invoking a Master, thus, I cried with a great voice, calling, beseeching, asking.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
In an instant it looked as if the whole universe was transformed, such is the power of the Verb.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
I openly admit with the most complete frankness that it was not difficult for me to undertake astral travelling; I simply made good use of the transitional state between wakefulness and sleep. The instant I began to sleep I delicately rose from my bed and went out to the street. Obviously the physical body remained asleep in bed.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Another afternoon he came to tell me that he had been in contact with the owner of that house - a very famous doctor of the city - and he begged me to investigate whether or not this person was in fact the owner of the said property as he had his doubts.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Flying, floating in the astral atmosphere of planet Earth, I wandered through various streets looking for the Doctor's surgery. I prayed to my Elemental Intercessor to take me to that office and it is evident that I was assisted.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971 also in Elemental Magic
An account
Thereby the achievement of the projection of the EIDOLON was successfully completed. I still accurately remember that remarkable psychic experiment.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Upon reaching a certain house I understood; three steps led to the sumptuous porch of a mansion...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I went through those doors and found myself in a waiting room, advancing some more, I boldly entered the consulting room...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Examining the interior of this last room in detail, I saw a table and upon it a typewriter and some other things; a window looked out onto the patio of the residence, the Doctor was seated and in his aura could be seen his above mentioned ownership...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I returned to my physical body extremely satisfied with the experiment, the EIDOLON is certainly extraordinary...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Since I know in depth all the psychic functions of the Eidolon (Astral Body of the SuperMan), it was not difficult for me to make a magic split. Dressed in that sidereal body, widely mentioned by Philip Teofasto Bombasto of Honheneim (Aureola Paracelsus), I left my Physical body in order to move freely within the fifth dimension of Nature, the astral world.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
One night I set out to investigate directly the discarnated Rasputin.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
What I saw with my spatial sense (the Eye of Horus) was terrible. I affirm emphatically that I had to enter a horrible tavern where you could only see barrels full of wine amongst which there were a multitude of horrifying creatures, very much like human beings. I looked for Rasputin, the Sacred Devil. I wanted to talk to that strange monk before whom so many princes, counts, dukes and marquises of the Russian nobility had shuddered; but here instead of one Ego I saw many Egos, and all of them were part of the same Ego of the monk Gregory Rasputin.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I had in front of my spiritual sight, in front of my Cosmic Being a bunch of Devils; a Pluralized Ego within which there was only one worthy element. I am referring to the Essence.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Since I could find no one responsible, I approached one of those abominable grotesque creatures that passed near me: "Here is the place where you ended up Rasputin. This was the result of your disorded life and the many orgies and vices."
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I cannot deny that I did the same, but instead of sinking beneath the waters of the Ponto, I floated deliciously whilst in space, a star smiled at me.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Unreal shadows ascended the heights to where Roberto and I stood.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Terrified, Roberto plunged, head first, falling into the abyss like an inverted Pentacle and was lost once and for all in the stormy waters.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
It is clear that such an astral experience impressed me vividly; I understood the future awaiting my friend.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Floating with the EIDOLON in the astral atmosphere of the planet Earth, I entered through the gigantic doors of a great building.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
To rise out from dense form certainly cost me no hardship, the experience was marvellous.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Situated at the foot of a flight of stairs that led to the upper floors. I could establish that there was a fork in the steps approaching the base.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I cried out in great voice, pronouncing the name of the deceased and then patiently awaited the outcome...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
The latter certainly did not keep me waiting long. I was startled by a great mob of people who rushed headlong down each side of the staircase.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
They all came together, encircling me, "Roberto my friend! why did you commit suicide?"
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Long ago, something unusual and unwonted happened to me along the path of life. One night whilst involved in very interesting esoteric work out of my physical body, with the EIDOLON, I approached the gigantic city of London.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I remember clearly passing a certain place in that metropolis, I perceived with mystical amazement the radiant yellow aura of a certain intelligent young man standing at a corner.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Entering a very smart cafe in the metropolis and sitting at a table I remarked on the afore mentioned event to a rather aged person who was slowly savouring the delicious contents of a cup of some Arabic drink.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Suddenly something unexpected happened, a person approached and sat next to us; by carefully observing him I established with great astonishment that it was the same youth with the shining yellow aura, who moments before had surprised me.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
And certainly the longed for day arrived, and I was taken before her; an Adept of the Occult Fraternity brought me out of my physical body in the Eidolon and took me to the Place of Worship...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I owed KARMA from former lives and was forgiven. I had already been told that I would have a special meeting with my Divine Mother KUNDALINI. I knew well that on reaching a certain esoteric grade I would be taken to her presence.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
I saw on the wall of the Sanctum a mysterious obelisk in which shone a terribly divine Madonna; it was my Mother...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
Kneeling down, prostrate in tremendous adoration, I wept, I cried out, I begged... That Madonna stepped out of the obelisk and came to me like a marvellous synthesis of Wisdom, Love and Power...
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
An account
It is unquestionable that when I rose from my bed instants after starting to doze, the astral separation took place, the natural separation of the eidolon...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
In a mystical ambush I waited for that instant of transition, which exists between vigil and dream; I wanted to seize this moment of wonders to escape from my physical body. The state of weariness and the first dream-like images were sufficient to warn me in an integral manner that the sought for moment had arrived...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
In a delicate way I rose from my bed, and walking very quietly I left my home, feeling full of a spiritual, exquisite, delicious voluptuousness.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Exhibiting that singular shine of the astral body, I left these surroundings, wanting to go to the Temple in Berlin...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Delightfully, I was able to travel over the stormy waters of the Atlantic Ocean... Floating serenely in the radiant astral atmosphere of this world, I arrived at the lands of ancient Europe and immediately went to the capital of France...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I walked silent as a ghost around those old streets that had served as a stage for the French Revolution...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Suddenly something unusual happened: a telepathic wave arrived at my solar plexus, and I felt the categorical imperative to go into a beautiful home...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
There is no way in which I could regret crossing the opulent threshold of that noble mansion, since there I had the immense happiness of finding a friend of my past reincarnations...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
This friend floated happily, submerged in the fluid astral environment, outside the dense body that lay asleep in the perfumed mahogany bed ...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Also in that nuptial bed slept the delicious physical body of his love. Her sidereal soul, outside its mortal receptacle, shared the marvelous joy of her husband, and floated... And I saw two tender infants of marvelous beauty happily playing among the magical charms of that dwelling...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I greeted my old friend, and also his ineffable Eve, but the children got scared at my unusual presence...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
It appeared to me that it would be better to go out, to the streets of Paris, and my friend did not disagree with this idea. Talking, we moved away from the house full of delights... We walked slowly, slowly, along those streets and avenues that point away from the center towards the periphery...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
In the outskirts of this great metropolis, I proposed---point blank, as they say---that together we visited the esoteric temple of Berlin, Germany. This Initiate declined the invitation in an amiable manner, arguing that he had a wife and children and thus wanted to concentrate his attention on the economic problems of life...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
With great regret I left this awakened man, lamenting the fact that he was postponing his esoteric work...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Outside the physical vehicle, in the astral body, I entered the subterranean world, below the Euclidean three-dimensional zone.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
What happened then was very frightful. What I saw there in the horrible submerged region was the same that had been seen before by people like Hoffman, Edgar Allan Poe, Blavatsky, Bulwer-Litton, the same things depicted with the distress of the poet by Espronceda, with his demoniac choirs composed of the discordant voices of those that sail without direction the ship of life, trusting like madmen on the wind of the passions and on the sinister sea of doubt towards good deeds, of those that fatally marry with destiny, of those proud people that want to build Towers of Babel of stupid ambitions, of those that lie, of those that fight for worldly glory, of those that stain themselves in the pleasures of the orgy, of those that covet gold, of those idle people that hate creative and fruitful work, of the villains, of the hypocrites and other victims of the Proteous of selfishness...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
There appeared claws, teeth, horns, trunks, shafts, tails, serrated wings, lacerating rings that threatened to obliterate me as the lowest worm...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
At that moment many horrible sounds arrived at my magic ears: screams, howling, whistles, neighing, chirping, mooing, squawks, meows, barking, spitting and snoring. I found myself submerged in the mud of all that misery; distress overtook me; I waited anxiously for a balm to cure my aching heart...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Outside of the physical body, a holy monk, a hermit, tried to pierce the palm of my hands with the purpose of stigmatising me. At the time when that monk hit the nail to perforate my hands, divine rays burst up..
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
And it happened that having gone on holiday to the port of Acapulco in the Pacific coast of Mexico, I had to be instructed on the stigmatisation of the astral body...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
At that moment I prayed to my Father who is in secret, asking for help. The prayer reached the Lord...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I abandoned the physical body and all the parts of my Inner Being integrated and dressed with the existential bodies of the Being, were to come to the call.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Answer: Distinguished lathes and gentlemen that listen to me. Every illusion is permitted to reincarnating souls; however, it is preferable to exclaim with Jesus, “Father, if it is possible take this cup away from me, but let not my will be done, but yours.” In these instants when I converse with you here, within the study of my own house which is also yours, something very interesting comes to my memory: It so happens that on a certain night I was called telepathically by a group of Masters of the Venerable Great White Lodge.
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Floating in space, I landed softly on the flat roof of a great building; the adept of the occult fraternity received me with joyful exclamations saying: the Archangel Samael has come and after the aforementioned hugs and greetings, I was interrogated in the following manner: “You, as Avatar of the Aquarian Age, should answer to us about the convenience or inconvenience of delivering cosmic ships to earthly humanity. Your answer is of great responsibility.”
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
Kneeling, I saw then with my spatial sense, the use that earthly beings would make of such ships in the future. The eye of Dhagma allowed me to then see inside such ships in an immediate future, merchants, prostitutes, dictators, etc., traveling to other planets of the solar system, taking discord to other corners of the universe, etc., etc. Feeling in those moments the responsibility that weighed on my shoulders, I addressed my Father that is in secret, saying, “Father, if it is possible take this cup from me, but let not my will be done, but yours.”
Yes, There Is a Hell, a Devil and Karma, 1973
An account
One given night, the day and hour does not matter, I was travelling with my astral body within the parallel universe of the fifth dimension. Then, while inebriated by a certain spiritual voluptuousness, I ecstatically arrived before the mysterious threshold of that marvelous Temple of the Twice Born. The hieratic and terrific Guardian of the Great Mysteries, as always, was at the door, and when I wanted to enter something unusual happened.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
While fixedly looking at me, he said with a severe voice: “Among a group of Brethren who have worked in the Ninth Sphere, and who after having worked in that region, presented themselves in this Temple, you were the most advanced one. But now you are stagnant in your progress.”
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
Those words pronounced with too much severity by the Guardian at the threshold of the Mystery, certainly left me perplexed, confused and indecisive. I could think of nothing else but to ask: “Why?”
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
Then, the Hierarch answered my question, “Because of your lack of love.”
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
Fortunately, thanks be given to God, we, Litelantes and I, know how to consciously and positively travel in the Astral Body. Therefore, it was not a problem for us to present ourselves together in the palace of this Great Archon, within the parallel universe of the fifth dimension.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
The numerous remedies which were administrated to her frankly were useless. In her infantile face, the unmistakable profile of death was already starting to be drawn with horror.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
By all means the failure was standing out, the case was lost, and I did not have any other chance than to visit the Dragon of the Law, the terrible genie of Karma whose name is Anubis.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
That Temple of Karma is impressive, majestic and grandiose.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
The Hierarch was there, seated on his throne, imposing, and terribly divine. Anyone would be frightened to see him officiating with that sacred mask of a jackal, just as he appears in many embossments of the ancient Egypt of the Pharaohs.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
Finally, the opportunity to talk to him was granted to me, and clearly I did not let it pass away so easily: “You have a debt with me” I told him. “Which one?” he answered astonished.
Runic Magic, 1969
An account
Later on I felt that the Silver Cord, the famous Antakarana, the Thread of Life, had not yet been broken. Then I had to return to the physical body to continue with the hard struggle of every moment...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Feeling absolutely discarnate, I left with the intention of arriving at a remote place where I should help others...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
At such a moment of mystical enchantment, I told myself: I will not take a physical body again for a long time...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
This is the island of Avalon, the magic Jinn region where the Holy Gods live...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
When the Saturnine work in the abode of Pluto was finished, I was then transported in the eidolon to the Solar Land of the Hyperboreans...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
So, filled with deep bitterness I said, “How much I have fought there in the physical world in order for these people to awaken their consciousness and still they continue to sleep.” The Chela had assumed a gigantic figure. The pluralized ‘I’ (a conjunction of distinct and diverse entities), engulfed within the lunar bodies was giving him that aspect. It was bizarre to see this enormo us grayish coloured giant slowly walking like a zombie along the old atrium of this ancient Cathedral while heading towards his home where his physical body was sleeping. In those moments I could only exclaim, “What ugly lunar bodies they are!” Nonetheless, the venerated Elder, while inebriated with compassion replied unto me, “Inside the temple which you are now going to enter (a Jinn Temple, an Aztec sanctuary), there are many like this one so look at them with sympathy.” I replied, “It is clear that I will look upon them with sympathy.”
Runic Magic, 1969 also in Awakening
An account
This appeared so terrible to me that I exclaimed, “What do you think you are doing? You are committing a great sacrilege. For God’s sake, withdraw yourself from here and leave the relic in its place.” Nevertheless, the Master filled with infinite compassion replied, “It is not his fault in this matter, he is asleep.”
Runic Magic, 1969 also in Awakening
An account
Afterwards, like a pilgrim on the path who wants to heal the afflicted heart with a precious balm, he grasped the head of this sleeping neophyte, and blew the living FOHAT upon his face with the purpose of awakening him, but everything was useless. This Chela continued sleeping, dreaming.
Runic Magic, 1969 also in Awakening
An account
Once that work was completed, I descended again to the astral world. I penetrated within my astral body, and there, in possession of that vehicle, I found myself inside a great temple –the same as the previous night– I was then received with joy, celebration, I was congratulated. Subsequently, my inner Buddha or the intimate Buddha instructed me profoundly; he took me in the mental body to the movie theaters to show me what such halls are. I discovered that they were all full of larvae, of representations created by the very same people who attended the movies: mental forms deposited there, in those dens of black magic. The inner Buddha instructed me about all the dangers involved in going to the cinemas; he told me that, instead of going to see movies, I should review my previous lives, and he even made me review some parts. Then he took a sword, broke it in two and told me: “This is what can happen to you, and you will lose your sword if you continue to attend those dens of black magic.”
The Fifth Gospel The Danger of Mental Effigies Third Chamber – Mexico City – June 1977
An account
I had no choice but to leave that temple and I came, very heartbroken, directly to the physical body. Already in the dense vehicle, I concentrated on the Christ asking for his forgiveness; I recognized the mistake of having gone to that movie, I understood that I had created an effigy with my mind, and I begged the Merciful One to test me again.
The Fifth Gospel The Danger of Mental Effigies Third Chamber – Mexico City – June 1977
An account
I was heard because there was a real com-punction of the heart and, the next night, my mental body was taken to the same place, to the same table, to the same chairs in front of the table, and to the same lady, who was nothing more than a representation of mental nature. When she wanted to start the same flirtation as the night before, I remembered my purpose of correction. I drew my flaming sword at once and pierced that mental lady with the sword. Then I disintegrated it, because it was a mental form. The flames of the sword allowed it to be pulverized, reduced to ashes promptly.
The Fifth Gospel The Danger of Mental Effigies Third Chamber – Mexico City – June 1977
IThe physical body floats simply by means of faith
What the Jinn state is: the physical body placed in the fourth dimension, what it can do there, the scriptural cases, the black Jinn, and what the heart and chastity have to do with it.
“Hidden from our sight by the veil of the fourth dimension are Djinns, beings, people and things.” In chapter three we spoke about the four bodies of sin; these bodies serve for the manifestation of the human being in the physical world. However, the physical body is only one amongst four, which the profane are aware of since the ethereal, astral and mental bodies are unknown to them. The physical body can manifest itself within the planes or suprasensible worlds without losing its physiological characteristics. The law of gravity reigns in this physical-chemical world and the law of levitation in the worlds of the fourth dimension.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
The forces of the subconscious become activated during sleep and these powerful energies are precisely the ones which allow us to “place our physical body within the astral plane”. This is what is called the “Jinn” state.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
How did the ‘Mamas’ take Juan Bautista Miranda’s body? Dr. Steiner states that a physical body can remain within the internal worlds without losing its physical characteristics. This is what is called “Jinn State.” In the case of Juan Bautista Miranda, the ‘Mamas’ operated by submerging his assumed dead body within the Astral plane. This is how they transported him to the Sierra Nevada. We know that there are Fakirs in India who bury themselves alive and they endure months in this buried state. The case of Miranda was analogous.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The physical body floats simply by means of faith. We abandon the force of gravity and the physical plane. So, we penetrate with our physical body into the astral plane, where the laws of levitation reign.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
We can also take advantage of the instant in which we are getting sleepy, or simply, in the instant in which the mind is in a profound repose, as a tranquil lake.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
Jinn science is based on hyperspace; it is a special branch of atomic physics.
The Yellow Book, 1959
The absurd affirmation that the physical world of experimentation is the only thing that is real turns out to be a very common belief among the illustrious ignorant, who have never investigated electromagnetic fields and the socalled pro-matter, as a causa causorum of physical matter. The fourth dimension is hyperspatial. Gnostics have special techniques in order to place their physical body within hyperspace. It does not matter if the ignorant laugh at the Jinn state. The one who laughs at what he does not know is on the way to becoming a fool. Truly, only the fool laughs and he laughs at what he does not know.
The Yellow Book, 1959
Gnostic scientists can place their physical bodies in the “Jinn state” and move consciously in hyperspace.
The Yellow Book, 1959
When the body of a yogi is placed in hyperspace we say that he is in the Jinn state.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
When mental force is consciously managed, we can place the physical body into hyperspace. Jinn science is a matter of vibration. Above and below the limits of objective perception, there exist worlds that are located in other dimensions. With the power of thought we can accelerate the oscillatory frequency and normal vibration of the physical body by means of certain keys of Jinn science, which we will give next. This is how we then penetrate with the physical body into hyperspace. When scientists gain absolute control over atomic movement, they will be able to place any object into hyperspace. The devotees of the Jinn religion, prior to the practice of Pranayama, must pray to their Divine Mother, beseeching her to give them the power to place the physical body in the Jinn state.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
13. Undoubtedly, to float in the air and to penetrate into the body of another person is very easy; it can be accomplished by anybody, even if he is a beginner in these studies. 14. To float in the air is as easy as drinking a cup of water.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
15. The secret is very simple; it is enough for the disciple to learn how to penetrate into the Astral plane with his physical body.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
18. If the disciple achieves floating in the air, it is because his physical body has penetrated into the Astral plane. Thus, the disciple can go across space and soar to any given place of the Earth.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
21. Therefore, to float in the air with the physical body can be done by anyone. What is important is to have faith, tenacity and very much patience.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
20. While the physical body is inside the Astral plane it becomes submitted to the laws of the Astral plane but without losing its physiological characteristics.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
Although the notion may be unusual, we emphasize the idea that it is possible to transpose the physical body to the fourth dimension.
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
During childhood we all hear many stories about witches and fairies. Our grandmothers always told us tales of witches climbing onto their brooms at midnight and traveling through the clouds. Al though this appears incredible to many students of occultism, theosophy, rosicrucianism etc, and these witches really exist. They do not ride on brooms as our grandmothers believed, but they do know how to travel through the air. These socalled witches travel with their body of flesh and bone through space. They know how to take advantage of hyperspace to transport themselves from one place to another with their physical bodies. Soon astrophysics will discover the existence of hyperspace. This can be demonstrated with hyper geometry. When a body is submerged in hyperspace, it is said to have entered a state of Jinas. Every body in the state of Jinas escapes from the law of gravity. Then it floats in hyperspace.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
With the power of the Flying Serpent we can take the physical body out of the world of three dimensions, and pass to the fourth dimension. In more advanced states we can take the physical body to the fifth or the sixth dimension.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
White magicians and black magicians use the Flying Serpent to travel in the astral body, or with the physical body in a state of Jinas. White magicians, in profound meditation, know how to pray and to supplicate to the Serpent of Bronze to be transported to any place on earth or in the cosmos, and the Flying Serpent transports them. Black magicians pray to the Tempting Serpent of Eden and it takes them to the abyss, or to the salons of witchcraft, or to the witches’ sabbath etc. The Serpent of Bronze rises through the medullar channel. The Tempting Serpent descends from the coccyx toward the Atomic Infernos of Nature. This is the tail of Satan. Devils have their power in the tail.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
From the above statement, we can infer that any magician traveling into the fourth coordinate with his physical body instantaneously breaks the barrier of the speed of light. It was in Coatepec, Tula, the historic place, where the sixty old sorcerers of the powerful Moctezuma could instantaneously break the speed of light barrier with the assistance of the extraordinary Faustian Mephistopheles. They traveled throughout the fourth vertical to the sacred and eternal island beyond the seas of the North Pole — the true cradle of earthly humanity.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
When submerged within the fourth dimension, a physical body can change its shape. When submerged within the superior dimensions of Nature, a physical body can float in the space.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
When we want to take the shape of any animal, it is convenient to get up from our beds in the instant of being sleepy. Then, by walking inside of our own room, whether in a shape of an eagle, whether in a shape of a white dove, whether in a shape of a sheep or lion, etc., we must work with the magical formula as indicated in this chapter. The dream has to be kept as a precious treasure, by being careful of not losing it in the instant of getting up from our bed in order to make the experiment.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
Ignite your nine mystic lamps, oh! Lanu (disciple). Remember that each one of the nine Initiations of Lesser Mysteries has a musical note and an instrument, which produces it. There are three conditions that are necessary in order to receive the Elixir of Long Life: Sexual magic, perfect sanctity, and to know how to consciously travel in the astral body. Many people can start by traveling with their own physical body within the astral plane, because this is easier. Later on, they can become practical in the use and control of the astral body.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
We deeply know about the infinite manifestations of matter and the Spirit, and we know that the fundamental base of the Being is not Spirit neither matter. The ‘Glorian’ is a substance, which gives its substance to itself, yet, it is not Spirit or matter. Therefore, when we affirm that Beelzebub had to erase his name from the book of a temple, we speak with much authority as when we say that we have to erase a name from a physical-material book. If material objects exist in this physical plane, likewise material solid objects exist within the astral region, because the astral plane is as material as the physical plane. Moreover, we can visit the astral plane any time we want by penetrating within it with our physical body of flesh and bones, dressed and prepared as if we are going on the street for a walk.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
After the resurrection, the physical body remains in the state of “JINN (meaning submerged within the supra-sensible worlds).
The Aquarian Message, 1960
In the Jinn state, the human body can fly, traverse a wall from side to side without breaking it or dirtying it, take up the shape of plants, of rocks, animals, become smaller or larger at will.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The yogi who is in the Jinn state can walk on fire without being burned; he can also walk upon the waters as Jesus did; he can float in the air. He can pass through a rock or a wall from one side to the other without being harmed at all.
The Yellow Book, 1959
There exist transformations of an inferior nature. Circe transformed men into pigs. The legend tells that Apuleius became a donkey. If one places his physical body in the fourth dimension utilising the states of Jinas, one can assume any form, becoming a bird, a fish, or whatever one wishes. The physical body in the fourth dimension is elastic, and may be transformed into an animal. The Latin mantra for transformation are these: “Est Sit, Esto, Fiat”.
Tarot and Kabbalah, 1978
A body in the Jinn State can take on any figure. Circe transformed men into pigs. Legend states that Apuleius was turned into an ass. The Latin mantrams for transformation are these: “Est sit, esto, Fiat.” We can only transform ourselves in the Jinn State.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
When the physical body is entering the state of Jinas it seems to inflate from bottom to top, from the ankles upwards. Properly speaking, it is not that it inflates, but rather that the astral forces permeate it giving it that inflated appearance GENERAL ASPECTS OF THE GNOSTIC RITUAL When the Catholic officiant passes from the side of the Epistle to the side of the Gospel, for the profane Romanists it is the passing of Christ from Herod to Pilate, but for the Gnostic priests it is the step from one world to another after death.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
The detached energy from the solar fire is fixed in the heart of the Earth; this is the vibrating nucleus of the cells in any living being. This is the astral light, the Azoth and Magnesia of ancient alchemists. When the Master Jesus walked upon the waves of the Sea of Galilee, he carried his body, submerged within the astral light. The astral light copenetrates the whole atmosphere; the astral light is the cause of all the marvelous powers in the human being and the sacred fire of all life.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
Through knowledge, willpower and faith we can submerge our physical body within the infinite ocean of the astral light. Thus, while in the astral light, we can dematerialize the physical body or mold it into any form we wish, making it elastic or fluidic to the degree of making it capable of passing through steel-metal plates, or through mountains, walls, etc., without receiving any harm; we can travel with it from one place to another at supersonic velocities or make it stay invisible from the retina of other people’s physical eyes.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
Christ, the divine Rabbi of Galilee, taught us the secret in order to travel with the physical body within the astral plane. Let us see verses 24-32, of the fourteenth chapter of Matthew.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
This is the Gnostic secret in order to enter within the astral plane, with the body of flesh and bones.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
Peter walked upon the waters because his physical body, by means of the force of faith, submerged itself within the astral plane. In the moment when he doubted, he went out of the astral plane, and he was close to sinking.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
157. When CHRIST walked on the waters, he did so with his physical body in the jinn state.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
When Christ walked upon the waters, he did so while his body was in the Jinn state. This is precisely what is called “Jinn State”. If Peter had not doubted, he would have also been able to walk upon the waters in the “Jinn State”. One needs faith and a little sleep, that is all. With an intense faith and a little sleep, we can place our body in the Jinas State. Peter became an expert in the Jinas States with the help of an angel and a little sleep. Peter was able to free himself from the chains of his prison and put himself to safety.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
The Bible narrates the case of Peter, who, locked up in prison, managed to escape by placing his Physical Body in the “Jinn” State.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
When John the Baptist was beheaded, the Great Kabir Jesus “departed into a desert place by ship privately” (St. Mark, 6:32), in other words, into the ‘JINN’ lands. Here is where He performs with the multitude the extraordinary and astonishing miracle of the five loaves of bread and two fishes, from which about five thousand men, not to mention, women and children were eating. Moreover, they took up twelve baskets full of fragments.. (St. Matthew, 14:15-21).
Parsifal Unveiled, 1970
The Harpies are black Jinns, they utilize the two negative inferior aspects of Prakriti. They submerge themselves within the fourth dimension with these two aspects, in order to fly through the air.
Runic Magic, 1969
It is not at all strange that these harpies having entered the unknown dimension with their physical bodies, can levitate and travel within seconds to any place in the world. Certainly they have secret formulas with which to escape from the three dimensional world of Euclid. In strictly occult terms we can label these sinister creatures as black "JINAS".
The Mystery of the Golden Blossom, 1971
In strictly occultist terms, we can well qualify these sinister and dark harpies by the title of black Jinn, to differentiate them radically from the white Jinn.
The Three Mountains, 1972
Those who wish to put their body in a Jinn state, those who want to learn to put their physical body in the fourth dimension, must develop the lotus of the heart. A yogi with his body in a Jinn state can fly through the air, walk on water, as did Jesus Christ on the Sea of Galilee, or walk through fire without burning as many yogis of India do. A yogi with his body in a Jinn state can go through rocks as the disciples of Buddha did.
Endocrinology & Criminology, 1957
When the Kundalini reaches the height of the heart, it then opens the Church of Thyatira. This grants us the power to act upon the four winds. The lotus of the heart has twelve petals and its element is the elemental air of the wise. All those who want to learn how to enter into the suprasensible worlds with the physical body must awaken the chakra of the heart. This is what is known as Jinn science.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
When the devotee beseeches his Divine Mother, he must be sleepy and submerged in profound internal meditation. The true devotee does not rise from his bed, nor does he eat or drink, until he receives the answer from his Divine Mother.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
So, in a practical manner, Joseph of Cuppertino gave the clue of the Jinn state. The heart is what we have to develop in order to be able to achie ve the Jinn states.
The Revolution of the Dialectic
Studying old manuscripts, like clergymen in a cell, we have found in the sacred land of the Vedas, the following phrase: “He who meditates on the centre of the heart, will attain control over the Vayu tattwa (ethereal principle of air). He will also get the siddhis, (powers of the holy men) Bushari, Kechari, Kaya and 50 on (the ability to float in the air and put one ‘s own spirit in someone’s body, and so forth). He will reach cosmic love and all the tattwic divine qualities.”
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974 also in Elemental Magic
When dealing with the apprenticeship of Jinns science or doctrine of levitation, the substantial development of the peaceful heart is undeferrable; it cannot be postponed. It would be incongruous and unrelated to the Tertium Organum or third canon of thought, to try proficiency in Jinns without having previously secured and strengthened the mystical faculties of the peaceful heart of the saints.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
We affirm that the Savior of the world actually lives in hyperspace with the same physical body that he had in the Holy Land. We affirm that any initiate who receives the elixir of long life dies, but does not die. We affirm that all of those who receive the elixir of long life will rise from the sepulcher on the third day with their physical body, by taking advantage of the opportunity that hyperspace offers us. They maintain their physical bodies over millions of years. The immortal Babaji and his sister Mataji have maintained their physical bodies for many millions of years. They will fulfill a great mission for humanity in the future sixth and seventh great races. We emphatically affirm that anyone who works with the Arcanum A.Z.F. can ask for the elixir of long life. They are the ones who die, but do not die. We affirm that any human being can place the physical body in the Jinn state at any moment that he wishes, if he truly has faith in the Divine Mother.
The Yellow Book, 1959
IIThe lands of Jinas
The temples, mountains, lakes and cities that exist in the Jinn state, and what can be visited there with the physical body.
The Holy Grail was in the physical plane, yet now it is within the astral plane. Also in the astral plane is the temple of the Holy Grail, which was physical in the past, and also part of the mountain of Monserrate in Cataluña (Spain). This is what is called jinn State. This chalice is filled with the blood of the Redeemer of the world, which Joseph of Arimathae collected when he was at the foot of the cross in Golgotha.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
We read in Krumm Heller’s book how Commander Montero entered with his physical body into the authentic Rosicrucian Temple of Chapultepec (Mexico). This temple is in a Jinn State, so, Commander Montero entered into this temple with his body in a Jinn state. Dr. Rudolf Steiner, the great German doctor, said: “A physical body can enter into the internal worlds without losing its physical characteristics.”
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
The natives of America knew about the Jinn states in depth. Therefore, when the Spanish conquistadors arrived; they hid their most sacred temples within the astral plane. As a result, the Mayan mysteries were saved from the Spaniard’s profanation. The Sanctuary of Mayan Mysteries is one of the seven great occult sanctuaries, which now remain within the astral plane.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
When a physical body is active within the astral plane, it remains subjected to the laws of that plane, without losing its physiological characteristics.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
An account
The sublime guru Huiracocha, Master Arnold Krumm Helter, talks to us about the “Jinn” states in his Rosicrucian Novel. Wise Krumm Helter describes to us a commander Montenero receiving a note from a “hugier” or servant. Commander Montenero sighed and said “at last”. Then he left the castle of Chapultepec and going around and around on the path of the mountain of Chapultepec, he whistled many times. A native then led commander Montenero to the temple of Chapultepec.
Zodiacal Course, 1951
An account
Is this a phenomenon of the fourth dimension?” asked the commander. “Yes, my commander, the uninitiated does not become aware of these things”, answered the native. Thus, with his body in the jinn state, Montenero received his initiation.
Zodiacal Course, 1951
In this manner, they will be able to know the great mysteries without the need of harming their minds with so many theories and sterile discussions of spiritualist schools. There are enchanted lakes, Jinn lakes. There are mountains, temples, nations and cities in the Jinn State. On the eastern plains of Colombia there is a city called “Manoa” in the Jinn State. On all the mountains of the world there are temples of the White Lodge in the Jinn State.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
Shambhala is a secret country of oriental Tibet. Jesus Christ presently lives there with his same resurrected physical body; he also has his Mystery Temple there. That country is in the Jinas state; the principal monasteries of the White Lodge exist there.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
There are monasteries of the White Lodge in the Jinas state in all the corners of the world. In the astral body, or in Jinas, our disciples can visit Shambhala and converse with Christ. A road from the northeast goes from the city of Ghandara until it arrives at the Sita and Bhastani rivers. The two sacred columns are behind these two rivers. Then, there is a lake where an initiated elder guides the traveler to Shambhala, the secret country. Profane people will never find this country, since it is very well hidden.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
In olden times the men of the First Races lived in the “Jinn” paradises and fell in this dense tridimensional World. Nevertheless, let us learn how to place the Physical Body in the “Jinn” state and we will have the privilege of visiting the “Jinn” Paradises where the rivers of pure water spring forth milk and honey. That is the “Garden of Delights” of which Mohammed talked about.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
“They shall dwell in gardens of delight “ (“Jinn” lands.) “A multitude of those of old.”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Logos, Mantram, Theurgy
With the physical body in the Jinn state, we can visit the temples of the Great White Lodge and receive direct teachings from the great Masters who initiated the dawn of creation.
The Yellow Book, 1959
In other times, the Temple of Montserrat and the Holy Grail were visible to the whole world Later this temple with its Holy Grail became invisible. The temple exists in a state of Jinns. The temple with its Grail submerged itself within Hyperspace. Now we can only visit the temple with the astral body or with the physical body in a state of Jinns. A physical body is able tobe taken from the three dimensional world and placed in the fourth dimension. This can be achieved through the wise use of hyperspace. Soon astrophysics will demonstrate the existence of hyperspace. The indigenous tribes of America had a profound knowledge of the Science of Jinns. The Tiger-Knights, in Mexico, knew how to put the physical body into hyperspace. There exist in America lakes, mountains and temples in a state of Jinas. The Temple of Chapultepec, in Mexico, is in the state of Jinns (it is in hyperspace).
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
The lands of Jinas, the marvels hidden within the “Thousand and One Nights”, the countries of gold where the ineffable Gods of the aurora live, become a tremendous reality when we find the lever of Archimedes. Supported by this mysterious lever we spring to the fourth dimension. The hour has arrived to liberate the mind and to awaken Kundalini. The moment has arrived for the human being to learn to pass to the fourth dimension at will any time he wishes. If someone who has awakened Kundalini were to supplicate to this Kundalini in the moments when falling asleep, asking to be placed in the fourth dimension and transported to the sacred island of the north pole, you could be sure dear reader, that the miracle would inevitably occur. The only thing that the Initiate needs is to know is how to raise himself from the bed whilst conserving sleep. The Snake will help him with everything when he in turn, knows how to help himself. “Help yourself and I will help you.”
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
An account
The Superior Adept of the Temple ordered me to enter and without further formality I went in. The Temple is situated inside the hill of Chapultepec. In other times this Temple was visible to the Aztecs, but afterwards, with the arrival of the Spanish, it entered into a state of Jinas. The Empire of Light and Faith of the Nahuas is in this Tern-pie. Two guardians holding drawn swords guard the entrance and no body is able to enter without superior orders.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
The Castle of Chapultepec shone marvelously with its thousands of little lights. The avenues and the central stairway were deserted and the doors hermetically sealed. It is difficult to enter the forest of Chapultepec in these midnight hours because the guards and policemen are alert and vigilant, and it could happen that if some Gnostic Rosicrucian student were to venture into the forest, they could be mistaken for some thief.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
The zeal of the guards is great because in the Castle of Chapultepec there are immense riches. Remember the solid gold dinner service of Emperor Maximillian, and the colonial riches contained in the halls of the palace. This is the most magnificent palace in Mexico. It is not important to relate how I was able to enter the forest of Chapultepec at midnight. The reality was that I entered; that is all. I walked along the avenue, turning at the hill of Chapultepec, continuing in the direction of the fountains that were constructed by President Madero. The path was deserted and the night dark... I spent some time waiting for a prearranged signal. It seemed a very long time to me, but at the end someone arrived who spoke on my behalf, and everything was arranged.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
That was a night of immense happiness for me. The Temple was filled with a Light of immaculate whiteness. It was Light permeated by Life and Spirit, Light that cast no shadows. This Light comes from a monstrance chalice. In such a Light the Soul feels filled with a truly indescribable happiness.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
An Angel entered the Temple with me and took a seat. The Superior Adept of the Temple showed us some very beautiful pictures filled with life and movement. There are many such pictures in the White Lodges. In his book entitled “With the Adepts”, Franz Hartmann has already spoken about this kind of picture, which he saw in the Rosicrucian Temple of Bohemia. The figures in these kinds of pictures are full of life and movement. This is called the Royal Art of Nature.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
The Superior of the Temple, seeing our admiration for the pictures, addressed the Angel and then myself, saying, “You are forbidden to touch these pictures.” The Angel faithfully obeyed the order; I frankly, felt tempted to touch them... They were so beautiful... A severe reminder from the Master, given in time, was sufficient, “I have already told you, sir that you are forbidden to touch these pictures.” “Certainly I do not intend to touch them.” was my response.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
The Temple shone that night with ineffable glory. It is impossible to describe such beauty with human words. The roof, the walls, was all solid gold. However, something filled me with amazement. I had heard so much talk about Theosophy, Rosicrucianism, Hermeticism, Yogism etc., etc., and here I was, actually in the Gnostic Rosicrucian Temple itself, in Jinas. There was only a small group of ladies and gentlemen who like myself had also been invited to the gathering in the Temple.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
I remembered the lecture halls of some professors of occultism, al ways full of thousands of people; I remembered the temples of the world, filled with thousands of human beings; I remembered the lodges that call themselves Rosicrucian with their millions of affiliates; and here, now, in the Temple of the White Lodge itself, the few that there were could be counted on the fingers of one hand. Then I understood everything. At first many people came to our esoteric meetings. As time passed, the number who attended notably de creased, and now only a few thirsty for Wisdom and Love were coming to us. When I understood this I spontaneously exclaimed, “The temples, lodges and schools of the world are always full of many people because Satan has enticed them; but to the temples of true Divine Wisdom come only a few.” Thus I spoke, with a voice that surprised me, and when I spoke I noticed that the superior of the Temple was in agreement. Then he said, “That is so, Satan has enticed them.” immediately after having confirmed my words, the Master ordered the Angel to go up to the choir of musicians and singers to sing. The Angel obeyed and after having ascended to the choir, sang the history of the centuries in opera.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
The Angel sang with a voice so ineffable and sweet that it resembled the Magic Flute of Mozart. My whole being went into ecstasy. To hear an Angel sing is something in your life that you can never forget.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
Gautama the Buddha or Gotama, literally means the conductor of the Cow. Every Cowherd, every conductor of the Cow can use the Jam fire of the Cow to enter the Jinas lands, palaces, temples and cities.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
What happened after... is known by the Initiates. Presently, the Castle of Monsalvat, within which is found the temple and part of the mountain of Monserrat, entered into Jinn state. It became hidden from the sight of the profane.
Parsifal Unveiled, 1970
There are also temples of light in Taganga and Gaira, majestic templesm august sanctuaries of the great Mayan initiates. Those temples are in a Jinn state—which means, within the fourth dimension—and these are the great cathedrals of Nature where the great sages of the "snake" dwell.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A gigantic and very ancient city called ‘Maoa’ exists in the flatlands of Casanare (Colombia). Such a city is found in Jinn state. This city will never be found by the ‘civilized’ ones.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
IIISomnambulists rise from their beds preserving sleep
Voluntary somnambulism: fall asleep lightly, get up keeping the drowsiness, take the little jump, and learn how much drowsiness to keep.
A practice
153. Disciples can also learn to travel with their body of flesh and bones in the “jinn” state.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
154. The disciple will lull himself to sleep lightly and no more, then, he will rise from his bed like a somnambulis conserving sleepiness like a very precious treasure.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954
A practice
155. Before coming out of his bed, the disciple will make a small jump with the intention of floating, and if he floats in the atmosphere, it is because his body already penetrated the Astral Plane. 156. Now the disciple will be able to take his physical body to remote places on earth in few instants.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practice
158. To take one’s physical body, a little sleepiness and much faith is sufficient. 159. The letter that corresponds to the Liver chakra is the letter “G”.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
A practiceNight 28
The key to enter with the physical body in the internal worlds, is Voluntary Somnambulism. The disciple should lull himself to sleep in his bed and then get up in the same manner as a somnambulist.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
Man can take out his body from the chemical region. Man can place his physical body in the internal worlds. The Law of Gravity reigns in the chemical region. In the internal worlds the Law of Cosmic Levitation rules over it.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Somnambulists rise from their beds preserving sleep.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
Somnambulists work and walk asleep.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practiceNight 28
The disciple, who wants to enter the internal worlds with his physical body, has to imitate somnambulists. After getting up from his bed, the disciple will take a small jump with the intention of floating. If he floats and sees himself as being excessively fat, it is because he was successful.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Our disciples will then be able to walk upon the waters of the seas in the same manner that Christ did.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Many Masters whose physical bodies are of very ancient ages, and exist in the Jinas state, live there. When Jesus walked upon the waters, he carried his body in the Jinas state. Any disciple can travel in the same manner. The disciple falls asleep lightly and then, filled with faith, he rises from his bed like a somnambulist, preserving drowsiness. He will then take a jump with the intention of submerging himself into the suprasensible worlds. When he jumps, he will float in the atmosphere; this is called the Jinas state. This is how one floats in space and walks upon the waters. Some succeed immediately, while others take months and even years.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
16. PRACTICE: The disciple must slumber lightly; then very softly he must get up from his bed as if he was a somnambulist; that is to say, preserving the sleepy state as a very precious treasure.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
17. Thus, in this way, as the disciple walks as a somnambulist, filled with faith, he will jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding environment.
The Mysteries of Fire, 1955
A practice
Thus, the disciple walking filled with faith, as a somnambulist, will jump with the intension of floating within the surrounding environment. If the disciple achieves floating in the air, it is because his physical body has entered the astral plane. Then, he will be able to go to any place of the Earth through the infinite space. Thus, this is how the physical body can fly throughout the astral plane, and remains submitted to the laws of the astral plane, yet without losing its characteristics. What is important is to have faith, patience, and tenacity.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A practice
We proceed in the following way: In the precise moment when we awake from our natural sleep, without giving time to any analysis, doubt or vacillation, and filled with a very intense faith, we get up from our bed, we leave our room, then we float within the atmosphere. Only our faith is what holds us while performing this. Consequently, any analysis, doubt or vacillation damages the experiment.
The Revolution of Beelzebub, 1950
A practice
Every student of Gnosticism has to learn how to transport himself in a few seconds towards his sick patients in order to visit and cure them. The procedure is in the following way: The disciple must lie down on his left side with his head rested over the palm of the hand of the same side. Then, he has to get sleepy with his mind fixed in the process of the dream. Dream images emerge during the state of transition between vigil and dream. The disciple must reject such images, because if he does not do it, then, he will remain abstracted within them and he will fall asleep. The attention of the disciple must be fixed only and exclusively in the process of the dream. Then, when he feels that the dream has already invaded his brain, he must abandon all of his laziness and get up immediately. The whole secret of this matter rests in leaving our home, going out towards the street. Yet, we have to conserve the dreamy state.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Laziness
A practice
When already on the street, the disciple has to jump with the intention of suspending himself in the air as if he was a bird. Then, he can transport himself in flesh and bones towards the residence of the sick person. In this way, the disciple will learn how to travel in a few seconds to the most remote places of the earth in order to cure sick patients. He can also take his herbs and remedies with him.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The physical body enters, in this case, within the Astral plane and remains out of the law of gravity. This process is performed by the powerful energies of the subconscious. This is why we insist that the disciple must leave his house while preserving his dreamy state. The dream has its power and that power is the energies of the subccinscious. It would be impossible for the physical body to enter into Jinn State without the energies of the subconscious.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
There exist people who after having received this clue perform this experiment immediately. Yet, other people take weeks, months and even entire years in order to perform what others can do immediately after learning the clue. Everything depends upon the degree of evolution of every one. This is what is called in occultism “Jinn State.” The powerful, energetic forces of the subconscious are the ones which take the physical body out from the chemical-physical region and place it within the astral plane. This is how the physical body abandons the law of gravity and this chemical region, in order to penetrate within the astral plane, where the laws of levitation reign.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The White Magicians also know how to place the physical body in the state of Jinas. Jesus walked on the waters of the Sea of Galilee by making intelligent use of hyperspace. The disciples of Buddha, making use of hyperspace, were able to pass through a rock from one side to the other. In India there are yogis who, by using hyperspace can pass through fire without being burned. Peter, utilizing hyper space, escaped from prison and saved himself from the death penalty. The great yogi Patañjali states in his aphorisms that practicing a sannyàsa on the physical body, it becomes as cotton and can float on air. A sannyäsa consists of three parts: concentration, meditation and ecstasy. First, the yogi concentrates on his physical body. Second, he meditates on his physical body, inducing sleep. Third, full of ecstasy, he gets up from his bed with his body in the state of Jinas. Then, he enters hyperspace and, escaping from the law of gravity, he floats in the air. The devotees of Santa Maria (witches and warlocks) do the same thing with the formulas of black magic.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
Whoever sees the elegant chamber of Jahve-Semo will be dazzled by its luxury and happiness. He will find himself there with thou sands of female black magicians endowed with an extremely malign beauty. The inexperienced Soul who penetrates these regions of evil can be led astray onto the path of error and fall forever into the abyss of perdition. The malign beauty of Nahemah is dangerous.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
A practice
In these Jinn exercises, the first thing that the disciple needs, is to have a lot of faith. For the one whose mind is filled with doubts, it is better for him not to enter these studies, because he could become insane. The second thing that he needs is to have more tenacity and patience than holy Job. The lack of tenacity in these exercises causes one to inevitably fail. Those who begin to practice and soon stop because of exhaustion, are not good for these studies; you should leave.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
Warning: With much drowsiness, one comes out in the astral body; with little drowsiness and ardent faith, one travels in the Jinas state. Learn, therefore, to graduate drowsiness. IMAGINATION, INSPIRATION, INTUITION The imagination is clairvoyance itself; to imagine is to see.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
JINN STATES If placing your body of flesh and bones within the Fourth Dimension is a very arduous task for you, if in spite of having done the effort you have not achieved it yet, then, bathe yourself daily with aromatic herbs, and before falling asleep call the ‘Seven Potencies’ so that they may assist in preparing your physical body.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Then, after your body is prepared, work again with the secrets which we have taught you in order to travel with your physical body through the fourth dimension. One needs to have faith in the Seven Potencies. The Seven Potencies are not the Seven Spirits before the Throne. They are seven Masters who can prepare your body. Ask and it shall be given to you, knock and it shall be opened to you.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
IVUtilize the energies of the God Harpocrates
The practices with Harpocrates and the egg: the mantram HAR-PO-CRAT-IST, the eggshell and its powder, the steps asked of the Lamb, and the signs that the body is entering the Jinn state.
A practice
If we invoke the God Harpocrates, he will attend our call. With the Mantram HARPOCRATIST, we can invoke that angel. With the help of that angel, we can place our physical body in the Jinas State. With the help of that angel, we can transport ourselves to any part of the world in a few instants.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
The egg has special powers, which allow us to place the physical body in the Jinas State. The disciple will warm up an egg in water, in other words, he will boil it lightly. Then he will puncture a hole on its more acutely conic extreme. Taking advantage of an instrument, he will then extract its yolk and albumen. The eggshell possesses the powers of the God Harpocrates. The forces of Harpocrates are a variant of the Christic forces. The disciple will place this shell beside his head in bed. The disciple should then imagine himself inside that shell. The disciple will invoke HARPOCRATIST and will ask him to transport him in the physical body wherever he wishes. The disciple should rise, preserving sleep like a somnambulist; he should pick up the eggshell and come out of the room saying, “Harpocrates, help me for I am going with my body.” In this manner, the disciples of our Gnostic Movement will be able to enter the internal worlds with their physical bodies. In this manner, they will be able to go to the Holy Gnostic Church in the flesh. In this manner, they will be able to receive the Communion of Bread and Wine and attend the “Pretor”.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956 also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
Our Gnostic Summum Supremum Sanctuarium of the Sierra Nevada of Santa Marta in Colombia is entering the Jinas State. Wherever there is a temple, mountain, or anything enchanted (in the Jinas State), the forces of Har-po-crat-ist are in intense activity there. Gnostic students should in no way become tired. Some succeed immediately, others take months and even years to achieve success in the Jinas States. Tenacity and patience are the foundation of all progress. With these exercises of Har-po-crat-ist, disciples accumulate that marvelous force of Har-po-crat-ist in their bodies. Later they will be able to use these marvelous energies to place their bodies in the Jinas State. With these forces, marvels are accomplished.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practiceNight 29
The disciple can utilize the energies of the God Harpocrates in order to learn to travel with the physical body in the Jinas state. EXERCISE Take an egg of a hen and make a small hole on its more pointed end. Using a pointed instrument, extract the yolk and the albumen; before that, the egg should be warmed up in water. The eggshell contains the forces of the God Harpocrates, which are a variant of the Christic energies. The student will place the cortex or shell on his pillow or near the bed. He will then lull himself to sleep while invoking the God Harpocrates. Just a little bit of sleep and very much faith is what is needed. He should fall asleep while praying with much faith the prayer of the God Harpocrates in this manner: “I believe in God, I believe in Christ, and I believe in Har-po-crat-ist, take me with my physical body to the Gnostic Church.” He will pray this prayer many consecutive times, and then, lulled to sleep like a somnambulist, he will rise from the bed, will take the egg and will then walk, while saying: “Har-po-crat-ist help me because I am coming with my body.” Before exiting the house, he will jump as far as he can and he will mark the exact spot where he falls when he jumps. On the following night, he repeats the experiment at the same place, trying to exceed the previous marked spot. Drowsiness should be preserved like a treasure; the power lies in drowsiness and very intense faith. One will mark the new advances daily. One has to persevere in this manner for days, months or years until succeeding. The progressive increase of the distance jumped is an evident sign of a great progress. This demonstrates that one is entering the Jinas state, little by little. Later, the disciple will get to jump three, four or more meters. Tenacity is very important; it is only in this manner that one triumphs. Finally, the disciple manages to really sustain himself in space, beyond the normal limit; his body is therefore in the Jinas state. People will not be able to see him; he will have become invisible. In that state, the body has become submerged within the internal worlds. It then remains subject to the laws of the suprasensible worlds, Levitation, Elasticity, Plasticity, Porosity, etc., without losing its physiological characteristics. This is a modification of somnambulism; a voluntary and conscious somnambulism. The energies of sleep and of faith are terrible. In this manner, we can receive the teachings directly in the internal temples.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
The third thing is to have method and order in the exercises.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
In India, by practicing a “samyasi” over their physical bodies, the yogis enter the Jinas state. The “samyasi” consists of simultaneous, instantaneous concentration, meditation and ecstasy. We enter the Jinas state with the exercise of Harpocrates. When the yogi practices his samyasi, he flies, walks upon the water, traverses fire without getting burned, and enters the rocks and caverns of the earth. The one who reaches these heights of meditation is already a Samyasin of the mind. In the West, we use Western yoga of which the exercise of Harpocrates is part of. The conditions to accomplish it are: Faith, Tenacity and Silence. The one who goes around telling others about his victories, loses his powers and becomes a scoundrel. That type of imbecile chatterboxes should be expelled from the Gnostic Movement. In flesh and blood (Jinas), we can visit Tibet and converse with the Masters and with Jesus Christ. Mrs. Neel, in her book, “Magic and Mystery in Tibet,” tells us about Tibetan Lamas who travel great distances in a somnambulistic state without becoming tired. Let us imitate these ascetics; we are totally practical; we do not like to waste time in intellectual vagueness. This is how we Gnostics speak, bravely.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
Wretched is he who utilizes these powers for fornication and wickedness. Those who acquire these powers, should only utilize them to visit the monasteries of the White Lodge, or to study the marvels of nature. After each exercise of Harpocrates, we accumulate within our internal bodies, enormous quantities of energies with which we acquire, little by little, the power to place the body in the Jinas state. One needs much patience.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
2. Ask the Lamb for the assistance of an angel which specializes in the “JINN” science. 3. The mystic must beseech the angel and the Immolated Lamb to take him (her) with his physical body into the superior worlds.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
1. The Mystic must lie down on his bed with tranquility.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
4. We the Brothers and Sisters of the Temple advise you to invoke the angel HARPOCRATES who is a specialist in the “JINN’ science. Beg to the Lamb, beseech him to send the angel HARPOCRATES to you.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
5. Release all your thoughts from your mind, clear your mind. It is necessary for you to place your mind in quietude and tranquility. 6. You must provoke sleep. Let yourself fall asleep without thoughts.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
7. While conserving your sleep like a precious treasure, rise from your bed and leave your bedroom.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
If the practice has been performed well, then your body will enter the “JINN” state, meaning, that it will submerge within the supra-sensible worlds.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A body while in the ‘JINN” state can float in the air (LAGHIMA) or be submerged within the waters (PRAKANYA), or pass through fire without being burned, or be reduced to the size of an atom (ANIMA), or be enlarged to the point of touching the sun or the moon with the hand (MAHIMA).
The Aquarian Message, 1960
An account
The Yogi of Benares was able to submerge himself within the waters for six months because, firstly, he was placing his body in the “JINN” state.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A submerged body within the supra-sensible worlds is submitted to the laws of those worlds. Then, this body is plastic and elastic, so it can change form, decrease its weight (LAGHIMA); or increase its weight (GHARIMA) willingly.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
Some devouts who were practicing meditation in order to place the physical body in ‘JINN’ state, were feeling the sensation of being enlarged or inflated like a balloon. If those devouts would have risen from their beds in those moments when they were feeling that sensation, then they would have had the joy of entering into the “JINN” state. When Jesus was walking upon the waters of the Sea of Galilee, he was having his body in the state of “JINN.”
The Aquarian Message, 1960
An account
Peter was able to liberate himself from the chains, and to leave the prison, thanks to the assistance of an angel who helped him place his body in the state of “JINN.’ The heavenly Jerusalem of the microcosmic human being is filled with formidable divine powers.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
The devouts must be patient with these practices of “JINN”. To persevere days, months and years is necessary, until educing, developing and totally strengthening the eight great mystical powers.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
A practice
The Guru Litelantes told me that one can place the physical body in a Jinn State with the egg. A small orifice must be made on the endmost pointed part of the egg. Then, the yolk and the white part of the egg have to be taken out through that orifice.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
Therefore, logic invites us to think that great occult powers exist within the egg. The Guru Litelantes explained to me the magic formula of the egg.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The egg must be slightly warmed up in boiling water before making the orifice. The disciple must paint the egg a blue color. That empty shell must be placed next to our bed. The disciple will fall asleep while imagining to be inside within the egg.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
The Master Huiracocha says that in those instants one must invoke the God Harpocrates, by pronouncing the following mantra: HAR-PO-CRAT-IST.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Then, the God Harpocrates will carry the disciple within the egg. The disciple will feel a great itchiness or rash on his body.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The disciple will feel himself uncomfortable, because he will have that uncomfortable position with which the pigeon, while inside of an egg, is represented. However, the disciple must not complain, because the God Harpocrates will transport him to any far away place. The God will open the egg and will leave him there.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
In the beginning, the student will only transport himself in his astral body. Later on the student will transport himself with his body in Jinn State. This is a matter of much practice and tenacity.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The HAR-PO-CRAT-IST forces are a variation of the Christic forces.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
Wherever a Jinn State, an astral projection, a Temple in Jinn State or an enchanted lake exists, the HAR-PO-CRAT-IST forces are found in an active function.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The disciple is accumulating these HAR-PO-CRAT-IST energies when he performs the practices of HAR-PO-CRAT-IST. Then, later on, these energies will truly allow him to perform marvels and prodigies.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
There exist many substances that will help us in Jinn science. The student of occultism must know what these substances are and learn how to manage them. Jinn science is terribly divine. The Orphic egg, the golden egg of Brahma, the Egyptian egg, etc., clearly symbolize the prima materia of the Great Work. The universes, plants, animals, humans and Gods come from this prima materia.
The Yellow Book, 1959
The egg contains great occult powers. The hen’s egg is utilized for Jinn states. Formula Warm the egg slightly in water. Poke a hole in the pointy part of the eggshell. Remove the yolk and the egg white.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Now grind the empty eggshell into dust. The yogis use this powder for Jinn science.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The yolk and the egg white must be extracted from the hole in the egg.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Every night, before performing Jinn practices, the devotee must sprinkle the powder on his chest and under his arms, or armpits. The student must then cover up and begin his Jinn practices. The student must have a large quantity of this powder for the Jinn practices.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
IIThe devotee must choose the Jinn key that most appeals
The first six Jinn keys of the Yellow Book in order: lying on the left side, the deer's eye nut, the call to Oguara, the jump from the table, and the tiger.
A practice
The devotee must choose the Jinn key that most appeals to him and must practice daily with this key with great intensity, until he achieves victory.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
This science is not for the weak, or for unsteady, fickle or inconsistent people. This science is for people who have as much patience as Saint Job. This science is for tenacious, courageous, tireless people who are as strong as steel.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
The devotee must lie down on his left side, resting his head on the palm of his left hand. The devotee must become drowsy, keeping watch over of his own sleep, becoming a vigilant of his own sleep. When the devotee begins to see the images of his dreams, he must get up very slowly from the bed but holding on to sleep as if it were a precious treasure. Before the devotee leaves his house, he must take a small jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
If the devotee, after executing the small jump, floats in the atmosphere, it is because his physical body has entered into the Jinn state. If the devotee does not float, then it is because he is not in the Jinn state. When the devotee is in the Jinn state, he can leave his house with full confidence and without any fear at all. In the Jinn state the devotees can travel to the most remote places of the earth in a few minutes.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
If the devotee fails in the experiment, if he does not achieve the Jinn state on the first try, then he must not lose heart. He can get into his bed and repeat the exercise as many times as there are hours and minutes in a night.
The Yellow Book, 1959
Some will succeed immediately; these are the fortunate ones who have practiced the Jinn science in ancient reincarnations. Others may have never practiced that science and they must begin to acquire that power by practicing Pranayama and practicing for many years, until they obtain the Jinn powers.
The Yellow Book, 1959
In reality, this key is just a modification of sleepwalking; it is voluntary yet induced somnambulism.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
This nut has marvelous Jinn powers. The devotee must become drowsy while holding this nut in his hand. The devotee must place himself in the same position as given in the previous key, but while holding this marvelous nut in his right hand. It is urgent to remember that this nut has a marvelous elemental genie that can help the devotee to place his body into the Jinn state.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
There exists a nut, commonly known as the deer’s eye.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
During this practice, the devotee must become drowsy while pronouncing the mantra Invia. Then, the elemental genie will come to the call and will help him to place his body in the Jinn State.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in Elemental Magic, The Yellow Book
A practice
The devotee must get up from his bed, holding on to the sleepy state as if it was pure gold. Before he leaves his house, the devotee must take a small jump with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere. If the devotee floats, then he can leave his house in the Jinn State. If he does not float, then he must repeat the exercise for as many hours, months, or years that it takes until achieving victory.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
There is a Master whose name is Oguara. This Jinn Master truly helps all those who call him in the name of the Christ. The devotee must lie down in the same position previously mentioned, but calling the Jinn Master Oguara in the name of the Christ, saying, “In the name of the Christ, by the majesty of the Christ, by the power of the Christ, I call you Oguara, Oguara, Oguara. Place my body in the Jinn State.” Repeat this invocation many, many times until entering into sleep; then the student must get up, holding on to sleep as if it was pure gold. The devotee must then take a small jump with the intention of floating in space. If he floats, it is because he is then in the Jinn state. If he does not float, then he must get back into bed and repeat the experiment.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The devotee must sit in front of a table, with his arms crossed on the table. The devotee will become drowsy with his head resting on his crossed arms. The devotee must invoke the Jinn Masters so that they may help him in these practices. He can call upon Babaji (the Yogi Christ of India), or his sister Mataji. He can invoke Harpocrates, or Saint Peter, etc. Then when the student begins to dream, he must get up from the chair automatically, instinctively and without any kind of reasoning, conserving sleep as if it were solid gold. The student must then take a long jump, as far as possible, with the intention of floating in the surrounding atmosphere. The devotee must mark on the floor with a pencil the exact place where he landed.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The student must repeat this exercise daily, untiringly and patiently. He must always mark the point on the floor with a pencil, to measure the length of each jump. This system is marvelous because the Jinn student can keep appreciating his degree of progress in the Jinn. For example, today the devotee’s jump measured 1 meter, tomorrow his jump may be 1 centimeter more than the previous day, and the following day one centimeter more, and so on. Thus, the student is measuring his progress in Jinn science with precision. Finally, he will discover one day, with wonder, that he has performed an extremely long jump, a strange jump that no athlete could perform; these are signs which indicate with clarity his progress in Jinn science. Following this incredible jump, the devotee can remain floating in hyperspace. Thus, he has achieved victory. This key is formidable.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Before leaving the house, the student must take a jump and then if he floats in the surrounding atmosphere, it is because his body has entered into the Jinn state. Then the student can direct himself wherever he wishes with his physical body in the Jinn State. If he does not float, then the student must repeat the experiment. With patience we can go very far in these studies.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
In the precise instant in which the student awakens from his normal sleep, he must jump from his bed instantaneously without any conscious or subconscious analysis, without the process of conceptual election, in an instinctive way, ecstatic for wisdom and full of faith like the steel of the sword that is well-tempered and ready for battle.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
The tiger knights of Aztec Mexico placed their physical bodies in the Jinn state with the help of the elemental force of the tiger.
The Yellow Book, 1959
An account
Some Mexican Codices depict the tiger knights heading to the temple in the form of tigers. They say that when they arrived at the temple they once again took the human form.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
In ancient Mexico, the temple of the tigers was very sacred. The elemental force of the tiger permits us to place the body in the Jinn state. The student can lie down on a tiger skin. The devotee can become drowsy while invoking the Devas who reign over the tigers. Beg them to help us with the force of the tiger.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in Elemental Magic, The Yellow Book
An account
The Aztec devotees of the sacred order of the tigers, while becoming identified with the tiger, became drowsy, and then holding on to sleep as if it were solid gold, they then got up from their beds walking on four legs like the tiger.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
An account
Thus, with the body in the Jinn state and in the form of tigers, the tiger knights arrived to the temple. The Mexican Codices tell us that when they arrived, they once again took their human form.
The Yellow Book, 1959
A practice
Then, full of faith, they said: “We belong to ourselves!”
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The Occidental yogi, lying down on the tiger skin while partially naked, must do the esoteric practice of the tiger knights. This is how he will enter into the Jinn state.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
IIIWhen starting Jinn practices, the Jinn Genii must be invoked
The Masters and mantrams called on for the Jinn state: miña pica frasco, the God of the Sea, INVIA, Oguara, Babaji and Mataji, and the apostle Philip.
A practice
161. The mantram “miña pica frasco”, serves to travel in the jinn state, from one place on earth to another. 162. The disciple gets up from his bed, like a somnambulist, pronouncing the mantram: miña pica frasco.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
163. Some disciples learn immediately, others take entire months and years to learn.
Manual of Practical Magic, 1954 also in Manual of Practical Magic
An account
After thanking the Scientific Astrologer that revealed to us the “JINN” Lesson, we decided to investigate on our own, in the Superior Worlds, to find out the scientific and esoteric value of said clue. With such a purpose in mind, we, the Investigating Brothers, lulled ourselves to sleep by vocalizing these Mantrams. The result was surprising. When we “abandoned” the physical body and were in the Astral, we then saw a Sea. A terrible God of the Ocean caused the unfathomable depth of the Sea to shake in a terrifying way. Etheric waves were formed which, spinning in a concentric manner, were trying to precipitate themselves with great violence towards the place where we had left the Physical Body. That terrible God of the Immense Sea had provoked the electrical whirlwind, the etheric hurricane, the dreadful force to rush towards where we had left the Physical Body, who knows with what mysterious Intentions, which our terror convened into fatality.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
However, that is the powerful Being who would have to come to our call, to place our Physical Body into the “Jinn” state, to submerge it within the Fourth Dimension and transport it like this to any location in the world.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
Naturally, the Hierarchies, the “Jinn Masters,” only grant such type of theurgic operations when the victim is unjustly in prison. No Master of the Grand White Lodge would ever dare to violate the Law!
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
Therefore, with the power of these Mantrams, one learns how to place the Physical Body in the “Jinn” State; and with that power, many victims can be saved from the pain and injustice of men.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
Such is the Clue necessary to PLACE THE BODY IN THE “JINN STATE.” We lull ourselves to sleep vocalizing the Mantrams we have revealed.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
An Angel will assist us. Imitating Peter, we will rise from the bed and will walk like a somnambulist. Our Physical Body will enter the Garden of Delights, in the “Jinn” Paradises.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
Then, they pronounced this Mantram: INVIA This Mantram is a true invocation: under its influence, the Elemental of said Almond answers irresistibly. This vegetable elemental then has the power of placing the body in the “JINN” state.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
When the Hierophant feels that his body begins to inflate or swell, from the feet up, then he comprehended that his body had acquired the “JINN” state. He would rise from his bed, filled with faith and definitely submerge himself in the “Garden of Delights,” and transport himself to different places on Earth. Whoever wants to practice the former, let him during such a process fall asleep, meditating on the Elemental of the almond, the “Deer’s Eye.”
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
We inform the esoteric student that there is a Great Master of “JINN,” whose name is OGUARA, who invariably attends the call of those who invoke him and who helps submerge the Physical Body within the Fourth Dimension.
Logos, Mantram, Theurgy, 1959
A practice
This mantra becomes a true invocation. Under this mantra's influence, the elemental of that nut assists with resisting. This elemental has the power of placing the physical body in a Jinn state—meaning, to submerge it in the fourth vertical.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977 also in Elemental Magic
A practice
When wanting to visit the garden of delights, the great Egyptian hierophants submerged into profound meditation while holding in their right hand a nut known by the name of "Deer's eye."
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
When the hierophant felt that his body started to inflate or to be swallow from the feet up to the head, then he comprehended that his body had acquired the Jinn state. Thus he rose from his bed, filled with faith, and submerged into the garden of delights, he transported himself to any place on the Earth through the fourth dimension with the elemental of that nut named "Deer's eye."
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A practice
Thereafter, the loaf of bread has to be eaten. The mantric words must be written on cross with a pencil or ink. When we investigated within the superior worlds in order to find out the scientific and esoteric value of this clue, we found the following: Once, while gathered with a group of brothers and sisters, we fell asleep by means of the effect of the vocalization of that mantra, thus we "abandoned" the physical body and entered into the Astral Plane. There, we inquired about this clue and were astonished by the outcome of our investigation. We saw a sea where a terrific god of the ocean shook the immeasurable depths of the sea in such a way that ethereal waves were formed, which, while spinning in a concentric manner, were menacingly precipitated towards the place we were gathered. This terrific god had provoked an electrical whirlwind, an ethereal hurricane, an inconceivable force, in order to precipitate it towards where we had left the physical body.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A practice
So, when we pronounce the mantra SENOSAN GORORA GOBERDON, that ineffable God will come to our call, and will submerge our physical body into the fourth dimension.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A practice
The devotee will sit down in front of a table. He will then cross his arms and place them on the table, voluntarily falling asleep with his head resting on his arms. The student must relax the mind. One shall relax and empty the mind of all thought until it remains clear and spacious. Next, imagine the drowsiness that precedes sleeping, identify with this and fall asleep. When the seated student feels that he has fallen asleep, he will get up from his seat maintaining this sleep. Thus, like a somnambulist, the student will take a long jump with the intention of submerging himself with his physical body within hyperspace. Right away you will mark with a pencil the exact place where you finished the jump. On the following day you will repeat the experiment marking with a pencil the place where you landed.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
A practice
If the student continues practicing, he will note that his jump gets longer and longer. The day will come in which he takes a jump that is beyond what is normal. This will make gladden the student very much, because it will indicate to him that his body is already penetrating into hyperspace. Constancy, patience, will and tenacity—at last these shall grant the student success. One day the student will be able to definitively remain in hyperspace. He has penetrated with his body into the internal worlds, he finds himself in the Jinn State. He shall then be able to transport himself to any place on Earth in a few seconds. He will be an investigator of the superior worlds.
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
A practiceNight 30
When starting Jinn practices, the Jinn Genii must be invoked. The devotee will invoke Oguara many times as follows: “I Believe In God, I believe in Oguara and in all the Genii of Jinn Science. Take me with my body to all of the Temples of Jinn Science… Oguara! Oguara! Oguara! Take me.”
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
A practiceNight 30
(This invocation is repeated thousands of times before dozing off to sleep).
Esoteric Course of Kabbalah
A practice
The devotee will pray this prayer thousands of times. The devotee should fall asleep praying this prayer. When the devotee feels more asleep than awake, when he feels his body as if weak and full of lassitude, when he feels as though drunk with sleep, when he al ready begins to dream, he gets up from his bed “conserving sleep as the miser conserves his treasure”. All the power lies in sleep. In those moments, tremendous forces are working which elevate the vibration of the physical body, accelerating the movement of the atoms to surprising velocities. Then the physical body enters the state of Jinas. It penetrates hyperspace. If the student makes a leap with the intention of floating, then he will notice with surprise that he can fly. In that state he is invisible to the physical world; in that state he can attend the Pretor.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
Undoubtedly, Philip, the apostle of Jesus the great kabir, is the patron saint of all of these Jinns phenomena.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
The sacred scriptures assert that Philip, after having baptised a eunuch, was taken away by the Lord and went joyfully on his way afterwards.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
It is said that he then went to Azotus, and upon passing through, he announced the Gospel in all the cities until he reached Caesarea.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
Any sincere Gnostic arhart can beseech the magical assistance of the great apostle Philip. With profound love for Philip, when you are drowsy, meditate upon him. Clear your mind of any other thoughts, and when you feel the joy of his presence in your soul, you will utter the following ritual phrase: “To heaven, Philip!” Leave your bedroom with a firm and confident step, and in that instant, break into the unknown dimension.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
An account
In the name of the Great Cause, I solemnly state that I owe the extraordinary formula cited above to a divine spirit whose name is Is-Abel. Her human personality is one of a barefooted, humble nun from an ancient medieval monastery, which is now found immersed in the fourth vertical.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practiceNight 30
These types of invocations are performed when we place ourselves in normal sleep. Philip can also take the invoker with his physical body in Jinn state. The key of the invocation is: “To the little heaven Philip.”
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
Philip assists the invoker and takes him out in his astral body. These invokers usually receive multiple benefits.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
Repeat this phrase thousands of times. If we wish to take the physical body, we pray to Philip for this service. If you wish to take only the astral body, you pray to Philip for this service. We must speak to Philip, we must beg Philip.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
In order to go out in the astral, we require a little bit of sleep.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
In order to carry the physical body in Jinn State, less sleep is required, and a great deal of faith.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
Philip, within each human being, is one of the Self-conscious parts of our own Being. Philip must teach the Initiate how to consciously travel outside of the physical body. Philip must practically teach the Initiate to place the physical body into the superior dimensions, in order to travel within the hyperspace.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practiceNight 30
There exists a clue in order to invoke Philip: “To the little heaven, Philip.” This is the clue.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
The mystic must submerge himself into meditation while invoking Philip. The mystic must arise from the bed when he feels that his body is in the state of lassitude and he must advance while invoking Philip.
Pistis Sophia Unveiled, 1983
A practice
Indubitably, Philip, the apostle of the great Kabir Jesus, is the holy master of the Jinn Knights. If you love Philip, you can then implore his assistance when you are slumbering. By excluding from your mind every thought, and feeling joy in your soul for Philip's presence, utter the following ritual phrase, "To heaven, Philip." Then depart from your bedroom with a decisive and firm step, and put yourself firmly into the unknown fourth dimension.
The Mayan Mysteries, 1977
A practice
The disciple who wants to travel with his physical body within the astral plane must enchant his body. The disciple must get sleepy by pronouncing the mantra: TO THE LITTLE HEAVEN PHILIP (pronounce it three times).
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Then, he will leave his room and will direct himself in flesh and bones towards the house of his sick patients in order to medicate them. This is a type of voluntary somnambulism, a modification of somnambulism. What is needed is a lot of faith and tenacity until achieving success.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
We, the Gnostics can enter with flesh and bones into the other world any time we want to do so. Therefore, whosoever wants to enter into the other world in order to know and visit it with the body of flesh and bones, very well dressed with hat and fashionable shoes, as when someone enters a garden party, then, I give the clue: 1. Lie down on the side of your heart, with your head rested over the palm of your left hand. 2. You must become sleepy.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Recite thousands of times this magic prayer and when you feel a great deal of drowsiness and a little bit of dream, then get up from your bed while reciting the prayer. Jump immediately, fly and travel.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
“Philip, Philip, Philip, Apostle of our Lord Jesus Christ, take me with my body.” “To the little heaven, Philip” “To the little heaven, Philip” “To the little heaven, Philip.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Daily exercise: Any time that you are at your work, On the Street, in your house, in the presence of a strange thing, or in front of a person whom you have not seen for a long time, ask yourself: “Am I in Astral body?”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The Magician will ask permission to the Father in order to travel with his physical body in a Jinn State through the astral space of the universe. He or she will beseech the help and assistance of Philip. Once the three days have passed, then the Magician can get up from the bed. The bed must then be cleaned and arranged with clean sheets, pillows, blankets, and clean bedspreads. The room, sleeping compartment, or bedroom, must be perfumed, swept, washed very well.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The Magician will also pray the “Pater Noster”, which is “The Lord’s Prayer”, profoundly meditating on the meaning of each word from this most holy Prayer, which was taught by the Adorable One.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
Not a single piece of clothing should be hung on the ceiling or on the walls, because that damages the experiment. Upon the day in which the Magician gets up, he must continue nourishing himself with water within which is mixed honey (bee honey) and some drops of lemon juice. In the night, after a dinner based on fruits and water that is prepared in the already indicated way, the male or female Magician will very secretly direct themselves towards their bedroom. Then, seven candles must be lit. The seven candles must be placed on a seven armed candelabra or on seven candlesticks, or on two candelabras of three arms each, plus one candlestick for a single candle. Subsequently, a very clean mantle must be placed over a table inside the bedroom. The table must be round and of three legs.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The male or female Magician must recite this prayer thousands of times while ever so slightly becoming sleepy. Finally, three mysterious Ladies or three magic Gentlemen will arrive. This matter pertains to three Jinn persons from the fourth or fifth dimension.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
“Besticirum cosolatio, veni, ad me, vertu, creon, creon, o creon, cartor, laudem, omnipotentis et, nom, commentor, star, superiur, carta, bient, laudem, om, viestra, principien, da, montem, et, inimicos, meos, o, prostantis, vobis, et, mihi, dantes, quo passium, fieri, sui, cisibilis.” AMEN, AMEN, AMEN.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
It is clear that three Ladies will arrive if the invoker is a male, yet if it is a female Magician, a woman who calls and prays, then three elegant Jinn Gentlemen from the world of mystery will arrive. Unquestionably, these three persons will utilize the Tarot and will cast their lot in order to define positions and to know who is the one who corresponds to assist us and to take us to wherever we wish.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
These persons will drink and eat, they will converse amongst themselves. Then, the best will come. After all of this, the magic person who has to help us will approach us. We must beg to this person to carry us with our physical body to any other place of the earth. If they tell us or command us to get up, it is necessary to obey. When the body is felt with that state of lassitude as when one goes to sleep, then, in that state is where one senses the invoked Genii.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
We must get up from the bed in that state. The Genii will assist us. The Jinn person who will be in charge of us will take us to the place which we will indicate. The physical body delectably floats while inside of the magic regions of the earth. Thus, this is how we can transport ourselves to any place of the earth.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
The previous Latin prayer must be learned by memory with the goal of correctly working with this secret, which serves in order to travel through the superior dimensions of Nature. Faith is the foundation of this magical work. Without faith one fails with this experiment. If the invoker is afraid, then he must not perform this work. Thus, the Gnostic Medics can travel with their physical body within the fourth vertical in order to assist their patients.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Fear
IVJinn science is not an opinion, but an established truth
The Divine Mother as the support for entering the Jinn state, and accounts of the state: his own with Litelantes, the Nahual, the Anahuac priests, and others.
The Five-Legged Cow is the Guardian of the lands and temples of the Jinn; the Prakriti, the Divine Mother, develops in the Solar Man, the power which permits him to enter the Lands of the Jinas, in their palaces, temples, in the Gardens of the Gods.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
With the help of the Sacred Five-Legged Cow, we can enter the Temples of the Gods with the physical body in the Jinn state.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
A practice
If the student meditates profoundly on the Five-Legged Cow, on the Divine Mother and implores her to place his physical body in the Jinn state, he can succeed. The important thing is to rise from the bed without losing drowsiness, like a somnambulist.
Esoteric Treatise of Hermetic Astrology, 1967
An account
For me, Jinn science is not an opinion, but an established truth, and if you want me to show it to you by means of a lived experience, listen patiently to the following story: In my present reincarnation I had seen the autumn leaves fall thirty times when I had to work consciously and positively with the Doctrine of the Jinns or Janus.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
One night full of marvels, Litelantes, my priestess-wife, made me a sublime invitation... I was resting on my back on the wedding bed, in a relaxed state.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I must solemnly assert, for the good of the Great Cause, that at that time I was in a condition of alert novelty, alert perception.
The Three Mountains, 1972 also in Awakening
An account
I slept, observant and vigilant, as a watchman in times of war. I obviously yearned with infinite craving for something extraordinary.
The Three Mountains, 1972 also in Awakening
An account
After the well-known, customary invocations, I felt as if another human being was settling on my relaxed body, on the blankets and bedclothes that were protecting me deliciously from the cold of the night.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Unquestionably it was Litelantes. I recognized her voice when in a vehement way she called me by my Christian name...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Ostensibly that Lady-Adept, through some extra help from 'Jinn' people, had managed to put her physical body inside the fourth dimension...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Let's go! She said, let's go! Let's go! I had waited for this moment for a long time with infinite yearning, so I urgently got up from our bed.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
It is obvious and evident that when I got up, because of the help I had, I went over the barrier of the speed of light, remaining then standing next to the bed as a penitent and anchorite, with the physical body well submerged inside the fourth dimension.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practice
Any sincere Gnostic could certainly do the same if at the moment of starting to doze he would intensively concentrate on his special and individual Divine Mother Nature... A very special magic formula is as follows: "I believe in God, I believe in my Mother Nature, and I believe in White Magic.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practice
This prayer should be prayed thousands of times at the moment of dozing off; it is convenient however not to forget the vulgar saying, "Praise the Lord and pass the ammunition''.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practice
My Mother, carry me with my body.
The Three Mountains, 1972
A practice
When you are feeling slightly drowsy get up from the bed, imploring, and then jump up with the intention of floating into the surrounding space. “Have faith as a grain of mustard and you will move mountains”. If you do not manage to float, go back to your bed and repeat the experiment.
The Three Mountains, 1972
Many succeed immediately, but others take months and even whole years to manage to enter into the Jinn paradise...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
After this short but important indicative digression, we shall continue with our story. I left my bedroom with a firm and determined step, went across a small courtyard and then on to the street.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Making way for me with much respect, a certain group of very elderly ladies bowed reverently at my insignificant, worthless person. I thanked them for the special deference. I left the city followed very closely by that group of Jinn people, and went towards the neighboring mountains.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I felt as if I had been plunged into a remote, ancient, sublunary past, and understood that I had penetrated the inferior cosmos...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
I was subject to tests of courage, being forced to go over deep precipices...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Floating in the surrounding space of the fourth vertical, accompanied by Litelantes and the whole retinue of 'Jinn' people, I went over the stormy sea and arrived at a secret place of old Europe...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Courageously, I went into a certain castle, where I contemplated with astonishment a strange symbol under which there was a cross...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
The return to my house was relatively easy, because it is a law in the fourth dimension that everything returns to its original point of departure.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Litelantes and I talked very joyfully about all this. We had obviously achieved a magnificent triumph.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Days later we continued with those experiments, and learned how to put the physical body in the superior cosmos...
The Three Mountains, 1972
Today, by direct experience, we know that with the help of the Divine Mother Kundalini we can put the physical body in a Jinn state, to travel around the superior cosmos.
The Three Mountains, 1972
Unquestionably magic invocations become simpler and more effective when one operates magically with the physical body totally submerged in the fourth dimension.
The Three Mountains, 1972
With the physical body submerged inside the fourth dimension, we can, as Jamblicus, invoke the Holy Gods to converse with them personally.
The Three Mountains, 1972
However, it is clear that we need with maximum urgency a point of support, a lever that permits us to jump with the physical body and all that to the fourth dimension.
The Three Mountains, 1972
In the eighth chapter of this book we talked with much emphasis about the magic agent of the Jinn states, I want to refer clearly to the fourth aspect of Devi Kundalini. (This is the point of support for the fourth vertical).
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
When I left my home and went out into the street I was able to prove that my physical body had penetrated into the fourth dimension...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
What soon happened in that night of mystery was astonishing: assisted by the Ineffable One I rose from my bed.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
She took me to the deepest forests of the Eden, where rivers of pure water abound with milk and honey...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Adorable Madonna of mine, by the Gods who from the high heaven govern the mortals on Earth, I implore your help...
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
Another one that self-realized himself with sexual magic was the Count of St. Germain. The Count of St. Germain, Master of Cagliostro, rejuvenated himself at will and appeared and disappeared instantaneously when it was least expected. The Count of St. Germain even gave himself the luxury of passing as dead and, after entering into the sepulchre, was able to escape from it by placing his body into “JINN” state.
The Aquarian Message, 1960
By taking advantage of the state between vigil and dreaming, they transformed themselves into tigers. ‘When their bodies had taken on the feline shape, filled with faith and confidence in themselves, they got up from their beds and chanted the following ritualistic formula: “We belong to each other.” This phrase refers to the Harpocratic forces which we talked about in the previous chapter. It also refers to themselves and to the mental forces of the tiger which allow them to sustain themselves within the fourth dimension with their physical bodies transformed into tigers. Do not forget that the human body while inside the internal worlds is elastic, ductile and malleable.
Aztec Christic Magic, 1973
An account
We need to pass through the five Great Initiations of Fire, symbolized by the Three Degrees of Occult Masonry. We need to return, to go back to the Divine Wisdom of distant Thule. Much has been said about this distant Thule, the Land of the Gods. The ancestors of the Eskimos and the Aztecs reside there. Quetzalcoatl lives there. From there he came and there he returned. The Emperor Monteczuma sent a group of ambassador magicians to that mysterious Thule. They went in a state of Jinas; that is to say, they traveled within the fourth dimension. Distant Thule is the Sacred Land, the Sacred Isle, the first continent to exist and the last to cease to exist. That continent is found in the polar icecap of the north, within the fourth dimension. The Aztec magicians sent by Monteczuma arrived there in a state of Jinas, carrying presents to the ancestors of the Aztecs. On their return they brought a message for Monteczuma and the Aztecs, which we could synthesize as follows: “If you do not stop your passions, cruelties and vices you will be punished. White men will come from the sea and will conquer you and destroy you.” All this was fulfilled by the arrival of the Spanish in Mexico.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966)
An account
Let us never forget Padre Prado and Bemal Diaz del Castillo who, together, observed with delight, the Anahuac priests in Jinn states.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
An account
The anchorites floated delightfully through the air and went from Cholula to the Templo Mayor. This happened every day at sunset.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
A practice
Outside his physical body, the Gnostic anchorite can consciously, if he wills it, invoke an isolated part of his own Being, which is defined in practical esotericism as the Guardian Angel. Unquestionably, the Ineffable will heed his call. Transparent serenity, limitless calm, or ecstatic happiness, like that which is experienced by the soul when breaking the bonds of matter and the world, is what we feel in such delightful moments. You can then, dear reader, deduce the outcome: magical services a la Lonhegrin, can always be received.
The Secret Doctrine of Anahuac, 1974
An account
The lady took this gentleman out from this chemical region (physical dimension) and thus, she placed his physical body and the whole of him inside the astral plane. This is what is called in occultism “Jinn State”.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
After medical intervention, the gentleman recuperated his lucidity and told the authorities all that had occurred. Naturally, the authorities declared that he was insane. Many years ago, a cadaver of a beautiftil lady had been buried within that tomb. Yet, the lady with her imagination within the astral plane had converted that tomb into an elegant mansion. Undoubtedly, she was already liberated from the attraction of that cadaver. However, she was not free from the attraction towards that beautiftil mansion constructed by her in the astral plane or within the astral environment of that tomb.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
Ms Neel comments to us in a book about the semi-flying ascetics from Tibet, who travel Tibet in all directions, while in a type of somnambulistic dream state. They do this without eating or resting in any place. Their journeys last for many days, without them getting tired.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
The Guru Litelantes, known on the earth with the profane name of Arnolda de Gomez, taught me about the Jinn State. This Lady-Adept is my priestess-wife and my esoteric collaborator.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
The Venerable Master Huiracocha relates to us in his Initiatic Novel the interesting case of the commander Montenero, who with his physical body in Jinn State entered into the Temple of Chapultepec, Mexico, in order to receive Cosmic Initiation.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
Back in time, in the year 1946, my wife and I were living in the tropical town of Girardot (Cundinamarca). One certain day, the Lady-Adept told me, “Tonight I will transport myself with my physical body in Jinn State to the home of Mrs. E... I will make my appearance felt by her. Then, I will leave there a material object for her.” Being somewhat inquisitive, I asked her: “Is it possible to transport oneself with physical body through the air and without ihe necessity of an airplane?” While smiling, the Guru Litelantes told me: “You will see...”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
I learned this formula from my own priestess-wife. She taught it to me in a practical way. Regarding this, it comes into my memory many interesting things from that time.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
The following day, very early, I went to visit Mrs. E... This lady, somehow overwhelmed, told me that during the whole night she had felt noise within her house and the steps of a strange person. Then, she told me that inside her home, which was properly closed with a lock, she had found certain material objects which were belonging to Mrs. Arnolda. I, overwhelmed from this matter, went to the Lady-Adept to tell her about the case. Smiling, she told me: “You, see that it is possible to travel with the physical body in Jinn State.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
Later on, she invited me to execute an excursion with the physical body through the dominions of those marvelous Jinn lands which Don Mario Roso de Luna spoke about. Hence, one night, the most quiet, the most silent night, I was lying down on my bed in a perfectly vigil state. Suddenly, the Lady-Adept told me: “Get up from your bed and lets go...”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
This Lady-Adept had placed her physical body in Jinn State. Thus, she was surrounded by the tremendous cosmic forces from the God Harpocrates.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
I got up from my bed and filled with faith I followed her, walking with a firm and decisive step. A spiritual voluptuousness was inebriating me. So, I decided to float in the air. I comprehended that I had submerged myself within the astral plane, yet, I did it with my physical body. I understood that when the physical body is submerged within the astral body it can levitate and remain under the laws of the astral plane, yet, without losing its physiological characteristics.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
Once, while in Jinn State, the Lady-Adept made me fly over great precipices and mountains in order to prove my courage.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
After having a very interesting excursion, which was performed in remote Jinn lands, the Lady-Adept and I returned to our dwelling.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
A practice
I continued experimenting by my own account. Thus, I discovered that in order to transport oneself with physical body in Jinn State, only a minimum quantity of dream and a lot of faith is necessary.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
The Jinn States permit us to perform all of these marvels. The Guru Litelantes showed me in a practical way how a physical body while in Jinn State can assume distinct forms, such as enlarging and shrinking itself by will.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
I knew the case of a ‘Nahual’ who knew how to transport himself to remote distances while in Jinn state, through the fourth dimension. The formula was extremely simple: That man, filled with faith and without admitting a single atom of doubt within his mind, was walking on his feet and hands, while imitating a mule with his imagination and willpower. Then, while walking around the whole patio of his house, he was reciting the following magic prayer: “Here is where the lame mule has passed through, here is where it has passed through, through here, through here.”
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978) also in Imagination, Inspiration, Intuition
An account
That Nahual was believing himself to be a mule, he was not having a doubt about it, he was inebriated with that image while reciting that prayer. Undoubtedly, the instant in which he was submerging himself within the fourth dimension was always arriving. He was taking on an animalistic shape. This is not rare among the Nahual people. Even when the modern scientists deny these type of magical incidents, it does not matter, because by no means will the ‘Nahual’ people and ‘Nahualism’ cease to exist.
Occult Medicine and Practical Magic, 1955 (ed. 1978)
An account
Well, in any case, my dear brothers, here we are to continue from where we were. One of the most remarkable experiments we did in this past existence, which our brother here Ch. attended, was to make a table levitate, to make that table float near the ceiling. All of you also witnessed that, but not all of you brought back the memory. Here we see, there in the comer, is A., who does have the memory of that table that floated. Such phenomena are seen in spiritism, but it was not spiritism that we did. We worked with certain Jinn people to raise up the table. Of course, those people with bodies of flesh and bone in the fourth vertical, invisible to everyone, were able to raise a table and make it float. What kind of people? Well-known people from the Jinn worlds. To raise a piano in the space is a simple phenomenon that can be produced, precisely, with the Jinn people, with our friends of the fourth vertical. And you, who is looking so attentively, we put you inside the fourth vertical during the meeting we had around a table. We still remember that day when in that carriage, we went from one house to another house, to a small living room that we had there, in Cuautla –which our brother, our friend Antonio, who is now called Arturo, remembers very well–; we did a remarkable experiment that someday you will remember, in which your physical body, in the middle of the meeting, entered in the fourth vertical to be transported to another place, and brought back after a brilliant walk. Anyway, one day you will be able to remember. And so, many other different kinds of phenomena were carried out in that past existence with all those present here, and with many others who have not come yet, but who will have to come. Therefore, brothers, we have been working hard so that you may be Adepts.
The Fifth Gospel The Binary Serpentine Power
VYou can also invoke your physical body from afar
Calling the body: once out in the astral body, pray for the physical body to be brought in the Jinn state, as in the Yellow Book's seventh key.
A practice
You can also invoke your physical body from afar: you will kneel on the earth and pray to your Inner-Self like this: “Father, bring my body”. Then, thy Inner-Self wilt bring thee thy physical body. The atoms of your physical body will tell you: “I am your physical body, don’t you know me?” You will be astonished when you see thine own physical body in sleeping clothes, face to face, the same as you left it in bed! Then command thy physical body thus: “Jump over my head and penetrate through my pineal gland”. The Physical body will obey you and you will be with your physical body in any remote place of the earth. If someone was to enter your room in those instants, he or she would not find you. He or she would only find your empty bed.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in Zodiacal Course
“In my Father’s house there are many mansions”.
Zodiacal Course, 1951
Each star of heaven is an abode and the door of each celestial abode is the heart-temple. When “out” of the body you invoke an inhabitant of another planet, you will see him come out from within the earth and on saying good-bye to you, you wilt see him sink into the depths of the earth. He has entered and left through the door of the interior of the earth.
Zodiacal Course, 1951
A practice
It is indispensable to take your physical body to the Gnostic Church every Friday and Sunday, at dawn to receive the Gnostic Holy Unction in flesh and bone. You can also take the physical body from the very bed without the need of invoking it from afar. Fall asleep vocalizing the following mantrams: Miña Pica Frasco Then slowly get out of thy bed, conserving your sleep. Execute a little hop and if you see thyself chubby and floating, then leave your house and betake thyself towards the Gnostic Church.
Zodiacal Course, 1951 also in The Wheel of the Year, Zodiacal Course
A practice
Those who know how to get out in the astral body, can invoke the body from far. This is done with the help of the Inner-Self. One prays in this manner, “You who are my own self, you who are my Real being, I implore you, bring me my body.” The Inner-Self will then bring the body in the Jinas State to the disciple. No matter how far the disciple’s astral body is, there will his body arrive. Our body will come humbly to us, and it will come dressed in underwear or sleeping clothes; it will come dressed in the same clothes with which we left it in bed. Emotional are those moments in which we meet, face to face, with our physical body. In these moments we are in the astral body; we should then order the body in this manner, “Body, jump on my head, penetrate me, through the pineal gland.” The physical body will then obey and will penetrate through the pineal gland. This gland is located in the upper region of the cerebrum. This is how our body will come to our call.
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
We will then be able to function with the physical body in remote places. In the Jinas State we will be able to visit the mystery temples to learn the doctrine at the feet of the Master. If you want special help, then when you are out of the physical body, invoke me in this manner, “I believe in God, I believe in Christ and I believe in Samael. Samael, bring me my body; Samael, bring me my body; Samael, bring me my body.” Repeat this prayer many times and I, Samael, your humble servant, will come to your call to take your body in the Jinas State. This is how I will serve you, beloved disciples, with the condition of right conduct. We, the Masters, are willing to help human beings enter once again the internal worlds. “Ask, and it shall be given you.” “Knock, and it shall be opened unto you.”
The Greater Mysteries, 1956
A practice
There is a mysterious chakra in the umbilical region that the magician uses for his states of Jinas. Every magician who finds himself far from his physical body, if he uses the power of this chakra, can beg his Internal God thus: “My Lord, my God; I beg you to bring me my body.” The Internal God can bring the physical body to the magician in a state of jinas; that is to say, immersed within the astral plane. In these moments the mysterious chakra of the science of Jinas revolves.
The Perfect Matrimony, 1950 (ed. 1966) also in The Perfect Matrimony
A practice
Those who know how to travel in their astral body can invoke their physical body from afar. The first thing that the Gnostic who is going to work with this key must do is to go out in the astral body. When he finds himself far from his body he may call upon any of the Jinn Masters and beg to them to bring him his physical body. He can invoke the Masters Harpocrates, Babaji, Mataji, Saint Peter, Oguara, etc. He must beg by the Christ, asking for the Christ, beseeching by the power of the Christ. The Genii of the Jinn state will then take the physical body from the bed and will bring it to the devotee who is asking for it.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
Before the body arrives, first come many bubbles that will appear before the devotee. The final bubble is the color red. Behind that bubble comes the body in the Jinn state. When the body is approaching, the student then feels as though his shoulders are getting very heavy. The emotion that we feel when the physical body is in front of us is tremendous. The greatest surprise comes when we discover that the physical body also has consciousness and will respond to the questions we ask it.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
In such moments, the devotees must dominate all emotions and control his mind in order for the experiment to not fail. If the devotee lets himself be taken by his emotions, then both the physical body and the devotee will return instantaneously to the bed and the experiment will fail here.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
In occultism, table work is called the instant in which the physical body, being invoked from afar, must inevitably enter into the sidereal body of the devotee. This act is very difficult because the body must learn, and the soul must dominate emotions and know how to command.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The soul must command the body to leave through the sidereal head of the astral body and penetrate into the devotee through the same door. The result is marvelous: the physical body obeys and enters into the devotee (in the astral plane); it is not the devotee who must enter into the physical body. In the astral plane things are very different.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
The body must enter the soul through the crown chakra, or lotus of one thousand petals, which is located in the upper part of the head of the sidereal body. The devotee must command the body and the body must obey. If the body does not obey, then it is because it does not know how to; therefore, the devotee must teach it.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
A practice
There it is the body that has to enter into the devotee.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
This is how the devotees remain with their bodies in the astral plane. The Jinn system of the seventh key is for those who are very well practiced in the use and management of the astral body.
The Yellow Book, 1959 also in The Yellow Book
Covered already by my super sensible vehicles, I could have called my physical body from the Chaos or Primitive Abyss; at this moment it was on its hard bed of penitent and anchorite, and it is obvious that this body would have also obeyed the call.
The Three Mountains, 1972
An account
The Great Master invoked his physical body with a great voice. That body, animated by the Verb, penetrating within hyperspace, rose up immersing itself absolutely within the astral plane. The sepulcher remained empty, the linens cast aside. In the astral plane the holy women treated the body of Jesus with medicines and aromatic ointments. Obeying supreme orders, the resurrected body penetrated within the soul of the Master through the superior part of the sidereal head.
Magnus Opus
An account
When a Master resurrects, the Magnus Opus has been consummated. Upon the third day the Great Master Jesus arrived in his astral body before his holy sepulcher. The esoteric tradition knows that the Master came accompanied by the holy women (they also came in their astral bodies). The Master was also accompanied by the Angels of Death, the Lords of Karma, the Lords of Cosmic Movement, etc.
Magnus Opus
A practice
When the devotee makes his petitions to the Divine Mother, he must be sleepy and be submerged in profound internal meditation. The true devotee does not rise from his bed, or eat, or drink, until receiving the answer from the Divine Mother.
Magnus Opus
An account
Inside the astral plane, the holy women in their astral bodies treated the body of the Master with aromatic ointments. Then receiving supreme orders, the Master received his body. The body floating inside the astral plane stood atop the astral head and entered inside of the Soul of the divine Master.
Mountain of Juratena
An account
In this case the initiate passes through the very same death and resurrection of our Lord Jesus Christ. On the third day the great Master arrived in his astral body to his holy sepulcher, then the Great Master invoked his body and it rose up with a great thunder and penetrated into the astral plane (the angels of death had not cut the cord that connects the Soul with the physical body).
Mountain of Juratena
An account
That is how the Master was resurrected, with the body in the Jinn state; we want to say with this that the physical body of the Master is inside of the astral plane. In this state he presented himself to the disciples of Emmaus and ate with them. In this state he presented himself before the Eleven (Apostles). In this state he demonstrated to Thomas his own resurrection, the Master then went to Shambhala, secret land of Eastern Tibet, the great Master lives in that country with other Masters of the White Lodge who had worked with the Arcanum A.Z.F. and attained the resurrection. According to Islamic tradition, we know that the Master of Mohammed was a man in the Jinn state, whose body was immortal. He had attained the Elixir of Long Life. Khedr was considered by a prophet by the Muslims. Khedr had worked with the Arcanum A.Z.F. This was the great Master of Mohammed.
Mountain of Juratena